]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
* lisp/files.el (file-auto-mode-skip): New var.
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33
34 @end ifset
35 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
36 @end tex
37
38 @set edition-number 3.10
39 @set update-date 28 October 2009
40
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory GNU Emacs Lisp
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990-1995, 1997, 2001-2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
232 @sp 1
233
234 @iftex
235 Published by the:@*
236
237 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.gnupress.org}@*
238 a division of the @hfill General: @email{press@@gnu.org}@*
239 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Orders:@w{ } @email{sales@@gnu.org}@*
240 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
241 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
242 @end iftex
243
244 @ifnottex
245 Published by the:
246
247 @example
248 GNU Press, Website: http://www.gnupress.org
249 a division of the General: press@@gnu.org
250 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Orders: sales@@gnu.org
251 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
252 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
253 @end example
254 @end ifnottex
255
256 @sp 1
257 @c Printed copies are available for $30 each.@*
258 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
259
260 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
261 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
262 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
263 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
264 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
265 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
266 Documentation License''.
267
268 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
269 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
270 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
271 @end copying
272
273 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
274 @tex
275 {\begingroup%
276 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
277 \endgroup}%
278 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
279 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
280 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
281 @end tex
282
283 @titlepage
284 @sp 6
285 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
286 @sp 2
287 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
288 @sp 2
289 @center Revised Third Edition
290 @sp 4
291 @center by Robert J. Chassell
292
293 @page
294 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
295 @insertcopying
296 @end titlepage
297
298 @iftex
299 @headings off
300 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
301 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
302 @end iftex
303
304 @ifnothtml
305 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
306 @ifset largebook
307 @tex
308 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
309 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
310 @end tex
311 @end ifset
312 @end ifnothtml
313
314 @shortcontents
315 @contents
316
317 @ifnottex
318 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
319 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
320
321 @insertcopying
322
323 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
324 every node in every chapter.
325 @end ifnottex
326
327 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
328
329 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
330 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
331 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
332
333 @c iftex
334 @c global@pageno = -11
335 @c end iftex
336
337 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
338 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
339
340 @menu
341 * Preface:: What to look for.
342 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
343 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
344 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
345 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
346 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
347 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
348 a region.
349 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
350 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
351 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
352 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
353 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
354 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
355 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
356 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
357 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
358 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
359 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
360 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
361 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
362 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
363 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
364 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
365 * GNU Free Documentation License::
366 * Index::
367 * About the Author::
368
369 @detailmenu
370 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
371
372 Preface
373
374 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
375 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
376 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
377 * Lisp History::
378 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
379 * Thank You::
380
381 List Processing
382
383 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
384 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
385 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
386 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
387 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
388 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
389 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
390 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
391 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
392 * Summary:: The major points.
393 * Error Message Exercises::
394
395 Lisp Lists
396
397 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
398 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
399 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
400 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
401
402 The Lisp Interpreter
403
404 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
405 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
406
407 Evaluation
408
409 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
410 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
411
412 Variables
413
414 * fill-column Example::
415 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
416 without a function.
417 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
418
419 Arguments
420
421 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
422 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
423 of a variable or list.
424 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
425 variable number of arguments.
426 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
427 to a function.
428 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
429
430 Setting the Value of a Variable
431
432 * Using set:: Setting values.
433 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
434 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
435
436 Practicing Evaluation
437
438 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
439 causes evaluation.
440 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
441 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
442 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
443 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
444 the buffer.
445 * Evaluation Exercise::
446
447 How To Write Function Definitions
448
449 * Primitive Functions::
450 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
451 * Install:: Install a function definition.
452 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
453 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
454 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
455 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
456 * if:: What if?
457 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
458 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
459 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
460 * Review::
461 * defun Exercises::
462
463 Install a Function Definition
464
465 * Effect of installation::
466 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
467
468 Make a Function Interactive
469
470 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
471 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
472
473 @code{let}
474
475 * Prevent confusion::
476 * Parts of let Expression::
477 * Sample let Expression::
478 * Uninitialized let Variables::
479
480 The @code{if} Special Form
481
482 * if in more detail::
483 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
484
485 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
486
487 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
488
489 @code{save-excursion}
490
491 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
492 * Template for save-excursion::
493
494 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
495
496 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
497 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
498 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
499 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
500 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
501 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
502 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
503 * Buffer Exercises::
504
505 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
506
507 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
508 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
509
510 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
511
512 * append-to-buffer overview::
513 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
514 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
515 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
516
517 A Few More Complex Functions
518
519 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
520 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
521 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
522 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
523 * Second Buffer Related Review::
524 * optional Exercise::
525
526 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
527
528 * insert-buffer code::
529 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
530 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
531 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
532 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
533 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
534 * New insert-buffer::
535
536 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
537
538 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
539 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
540
541 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
542
543 * Optional Arguments::
544 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
545 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
546
547 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
548
549 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
550 * Large buffer case::
551 * Small buffer case::
552
553 Narrowing and Widening
554
555 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
556 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
557 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
558 * narrow Exercise::
559
560 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
561
562 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
563 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
564 * cons:: Constructing a list.
565 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
566 * nth::
567 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
568 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
569 * cons Exercise::
570
571 @code{cons}
572
573 * Build a list::
574 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
575
576 Cutting and Storing Text
577
578 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
579 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
580 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
581 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
582 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
583 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
584 * cons & search-fwd Review::
585 * search Exercises::
586
587 @code{zap-to-char}
588
589 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
590 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
591 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
592 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
593 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
594 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
595
596 @code{kill-region}
597
598 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
599 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
600 * Lisp macro::
601
602 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
603
604 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
605 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
606
607 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
608
609 * last-command & this-command::
610 * kill-append function::
611 * kill-new function::
612
613 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
614
615 * See variable current value::
616 * defvar and asterisk::
617
618 How Lists are Implemented
619
620 * Lists diagrammed::
621 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
622 * List Exercise::
623
624 Yanking Text Back
625
626 * Kill Ring Overview::
627 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
628 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
629
630 Loops and Recursion
631
632 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
633 * dolist dotimes::
634 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
635 * Looping exercise::
636
637 @code{while}
638
639 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
640 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
641 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
642 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
643 * Incrementing Loop Details::
644 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
645
646 Details of an Incrementing Loop
647
648 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
649 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
650 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
651
652 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
653
654 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
655 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
656 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
657
658 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
659
660 * dolist::
661 * dotimes::
662
663 Recursion
664
665 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
666 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
667 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
668 * Recursive triangle function::
669 * Recursion with cond::
670 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
671 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
672 * No deferment solution::
673
674 Recursion in Place of a Counter
675
676 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
677 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
678
679 Recursive Patterns
680
681 * Every::
682 * Accumulate::
683 * Keep::
684
685 Regular Expression Searches
686
687 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
688 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
689 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
690 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
691 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
692 * Regexp Review::
693 * re-search Exercises::
694
695 @code{forward-sentence}
696
697 * Complete forward-sentence::
698 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
699 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
700
701 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
702
703 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
704 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
705 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
706
707 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
708
709 * Why Count Words::
710 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
711 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
712 * Counting Exercise::
713
714 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
715
716 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
717 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
718
719 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
720
721 * Divide and Conquer::
722 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
723 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
724 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
725 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
726 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
727 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
728 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
729 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
730 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
731
732 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
733
734 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
735 * append:: Attach one list to another.
736
737 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
738
739 * Data for Display in Detail::
740 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
741 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
742 * Counting function definitions::
743
744 Readying a Graph
745
746 * Columns of a graph::
747 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
748 * recursive-graph-body-print::
749 * Printed Axes::
750 * Line Graph Exercise::
751
752 Your @file{.emacs} File
753
754 * Default Configuration::
755 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
756 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
757 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
758 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
759 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
760 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
761 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
762 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
763 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
764 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
765 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
766 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
767 * Miscellaneous::
768 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
769
770 Debugging
771
772 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
773 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
774 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
775 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
776 * Debugging Exercises::
777
778 Handling the Kill Ring
779
780 * What the Kill Ring Does::
781 * current-kill::
782 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
783 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
784 * ring file::
785
786 The @code{current-kill} Function
787
788 * Code for current-kill::
789 * Understanding current-kill::
790
791 @code{current-kill} in Outline
792
793 * Body of current-kill::
794 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
795 * Determining the Element::
796
797 A Graph with Labeled Axes
798
799 * Labeled Example::
800 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
801 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
802 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
803 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
804
805 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
806
807 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
808 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
809 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
810 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
811 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
812 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
813
814 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
815
816 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
817 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
818
819 Printing the Whole Graph
820
821 * The final version:: A few changes.
822 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
823 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
824 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
825 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
826 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
827 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
828
829 @end detailmenu
830 @end menu
831
832 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
833 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
834 @unnumbered Preface
835
836 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
837 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
838 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
839 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
840 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
841 extension to the editor.
842
843 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
844 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
845 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
846 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
847 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
848 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
849 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
850 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
851
852 @menu
853 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
854 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
855 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
856 * Lisp History::
857 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
858 * Thank You::
859 @end menu
860
861 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
862 @ifnottex
863 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
864 @end ifnottex
865
866 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
867 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
868 you would any other programming language.
869
870 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
871 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
872 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
873 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
874 can teach yourself to go further.
875
876 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
878 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
879
880 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
881 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
882 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
883 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
884 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
885 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
886 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
887 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
888 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
889 there.
890
891 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
892 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
893 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
894 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
895 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
896 implemented.
897 Also, I
898 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
899 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
900 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
901
902 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
903 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
904 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
905 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
906 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
907 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
908 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
909 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
910 around your home town.
911
912 @ignore
913 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
914 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
915 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
916 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
917 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
918 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
919 @end ignore
920
921 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
922 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
923 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
924 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
925 advantage.
926
927 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
929 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
930
931 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
932 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
933 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
934 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
935
936 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
937
938 @quotation
939 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
940 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
941
942 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
943 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
944 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
945 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
946 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
947 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
948 @end quotation
949
950 This introduction is not written for this person!
951
952 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
953 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
954 different context, or to review it.
955
956 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
957 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
958 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
959 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
960 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
961 information is formally introduced.)
962
963 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
964 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
965 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
966 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
967 what is important, and concentrate on it.
968
969 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
970 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
971 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
972 as a daunting mountain.
973
974 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
975 document,
976 @iftex
977 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
978 @end iftex
979 @ifnottex
980 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
981 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
982 @end ifnottex
983 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
984 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
985 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
986 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
987 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
988 when you are writing your own programs.
989
990 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
991 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
992 @cindex Lisp history
993
994 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
995 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
996 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
997 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
998
999 @cindex Maclisp
1000 @cindex Common Lisp
1001 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
1002 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1003 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1004 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1005 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1006
1007 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1009 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1010
1011 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1012 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1013 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1014 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1015 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1016 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1017
1018 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
1019 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1020 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1021 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1022 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1023 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1024 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1025 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1026 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1027 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
1028 @key{ALT}.)
1029 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1030 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1031 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1032 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1033 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1034 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1035 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1036 press the @key{\} key.
1037
1038 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1039 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1040 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1041 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1042 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1043 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1044 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1045 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1046
1047 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1048 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1049 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1050
1051 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1052 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1053 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1054
1055 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1056 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1057 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1058
1059 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1060 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1061 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1062 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1063 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1064 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1065
1066 @flushright
1067 Robert J. Chassell
1068 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1069 @end flushright
1070
1071 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1072
1073 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1074
1075 @tex
1076 \par\vfill\supereject
1077 \headings off
1078 \ifodd\pageno
1079 \par\vfill\supereject
1080 \else
1081 \par\vfill\supereject
1082 \page\hbox{}\page
1083 \par\vfill\supereject
1084 \fi
1085 @end tex
1086
1087 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
1088 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
1089 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
1090 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
1091 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
1092 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
1093 @c Note that eg the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
1094 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
1095 @iftex
1096 @headings off
1097 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1098 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1099 @global@pageno = 1
1100 @end iftex
1101
1102 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1103 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1104 @chapter List Processing
1105
1106 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1107 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1108 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1109 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1110 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1111 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1112 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1113 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1114 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1115 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1116 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1117
1118 @menu
1119 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1120 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1121 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1122 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1123 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1124 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1125 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1126 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1127 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1128 * Summary:: The major points.
1129 * Error Message Exercises::
1130 @end menu
1131
1132 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1134 @section Lisp Lists
1135 @cindex Lisp Lists
1136
1137 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1138 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1139 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1140 to be familiar with:
1141
1142 @smallexample
1143 @group
1144 '(rose
1145 violet
1146 daisy
1147 buttercup)
1148 @end group
1149 @end smallexample
1150
1151 @noindent
1152 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1153 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1154 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1155 @cindex Flowers in a field
1156
1157 @menu
1158 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1159 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1160 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1161 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1162 @end menu
1163
1164 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1165 @ifnottex
1166 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1167 @end ifnottex
1168
1169 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1170 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1171 separated by whitespace.
1172
1173 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1174 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1175 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1176 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1177 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1178 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1179 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1180
1181 @need 1200
1182 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1183
1184 @smallexample
1185 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1186 @end smallexample
1187
1188 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1189 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1190 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1191 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1192
1193 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1194 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1195 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1196 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1197
1198 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1199 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1200 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1201 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1202 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1203 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1204 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1205 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1206
1207 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1208 right next to a parenthesis.
1209
1210 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1211 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1212 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1213 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1214 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1215 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1216 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1217
1218 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1219 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1220 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1221 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1222 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1223 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1224 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1225 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1226 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1227 as a synonym for expression.)
1228
1229 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1230 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1231 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1232 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1233 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1234 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1235 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1236 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1237 unsplittable.
1238
1239 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1240 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1241 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1242 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1243
1244 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1245 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1246 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1247 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1248 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1249 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1250 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1251 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1252 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1253 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1254 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1255
1256 @need 1250
1257 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1258 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1259 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1260
1261 @smallexample
1262 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1263 @end smallexample
1264
1265 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1266 @noindent
1267 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1268 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1269 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1270 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1271 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1272 used differently.
1273
1274 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1275 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1276 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1277 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1278
1279 @need 1200
1280 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1281 of the Lisp language,
1282
1283 @smallexample
1284 @group
1285 '(this list
1286 looks like this)
1287 @end group
1288 @end smallexample
1289
1290 @need 800
1291 @noindent
1292 is exactly the same as this:
1293
1294 @smallexample
1295 '(this list looks like this)
1296 @end smallexample
1297
1298 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1299 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1300 @samp{this} in that order.
1301
1302 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1303 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1304 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1305 order to tell them apart.)
1306
1307 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1308 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1309 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1310 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1311 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1312 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1313 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1314
1315 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1316 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1317 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1318 @cindex Help typing lists
1319 @cindex Formatting help
1320
1321 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1322 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1323 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1324 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1325 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1326 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1327 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1328 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1329 the enclosing list.
1330
1331 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1332 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1333 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1334 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1335 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1336 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1337
1338 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1339 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1340 @section Run a Program
1341 @cindex Run a program
1342 @cindex Program, running one
1343
1344 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1345 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1346 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1347 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1348 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1349 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1350 three things that you really want!)
1351
1352 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1353 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1354 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1355 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1356 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1357 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1358 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1359 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1360 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1361 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1362
1363 @need 1250
1364 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1365 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1366 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1367
1368 @smallexample
1369 (+ 2 2)
1370 @end smallexample
1371
1372 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1373 @noindent
1374 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1375 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1376 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1377 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1378 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1379
1380 @smallexample
1381 '(this is a quoted list)
1382 @end smallexample
1383
1384 @noindent
1385 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1386
1387 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1388 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1389 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1390 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1391 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1392 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1393 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1394
1395 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1396 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1397 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1398 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1399 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1400
1401 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1402 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1403 @section Generate an Error Message
1404 @cindex Generate an error message
1405 @cindex Error message generation
1406
1407 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1408 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1409 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1410 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1411 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1412 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1413 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1414 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1415
1416 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1417 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1418
1419 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1420 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1421 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1422 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1423 C-e}:
1424
1425 @smallexample
1426 (this is an unquoted list)
1427 @end smallexample
1428
1429 @noindent
1430 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1431 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1432 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1433 earlier, version 20 result.
1434
1435 @need 1250
1436 @noindent
1437 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1438 you will see the following in it:
1439
1440 @smallexample
1441 @group
1442 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1443 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1444 (this is an unquoted list)
1445 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1446 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1447 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1448 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1449 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1450 @end group
1451 @end smallexample
1452
1453 @need 1200
1454 @noindent
1455 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1456 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1457 debugger window go away, type:
1458
1459 @smallexample
1460 q
1461 @end smallexample
1462
1463 @noindent
1464 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1465 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1466 it.
1467
1468 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1469 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1470
1471 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1472 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1473 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1474 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1475 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1476 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1477
1478 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1479 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1480 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1481 backwards.
1482
1483 @need 800
1484 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1485
1486 @smallexample
1487 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1488 @end smallexample
1489
1490 @noindent
1491 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1492 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1493 @samp{void-function this}.
1494
1495 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1496
1497 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1498 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1499 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1500 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1501 computer to do something.
1502
1503 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1504 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1505 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1506
1507 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1508 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1509 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1510 contain the instructions is `void'.
1511
1512 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1513 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1514 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1515 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1516
1517 @need 1250
1518 In GNU Emacs version 20, and in earlier versions, you will see only
1519 one line of error message; it will appear in the echo area and look
1520 like this:
1521
1522 @smallexample
1523 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1524 @end smallexample
1525
1526 @noindent
1527 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1528 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.) The message goes
1529 away as soon as you type another key, even just to move the cursor.
1530
1531 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1532 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1533 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1534 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1535 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1536 moment.)
1537
1538 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1539 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1540 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1541
1542 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1543 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1544 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1545 @cindex Symbol names
1546
1547 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1548 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1549 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1550 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1551 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1552 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1553 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1554 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1555 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1556 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1557
1558 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1559 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1560 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1561 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1562 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1563
1564 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1565 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1566 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1567 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1568 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1569 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1570
1571 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1572 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1573 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1574 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1575 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1576
1577 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1578 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1579 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1580 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1581 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1582
1583 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1584 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1585 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1586 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1587 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1588 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1589 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1590 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1591
1592 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1593 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1594 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1595 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1596 yourself or the computer.
1597
1598 @menu
1599 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1600 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1601 @end menu
1602
1603 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1604 @ifnottex
1605 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1606 @end ifnottex
1607
1608 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1609 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1610 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1611 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1612 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1613
1614 @cindex Special form
1615 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1616 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1617 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1618 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1619 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1620
1621 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1622 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1623 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1624 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1625 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1626 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1627 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1628 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1629 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1630 used by the enclosing expression.
1631
1632 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1633 the next.
1634
1635 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1636 @subsection Byte Compiling
1637 @cindex Byte compiling
1638
1639 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1640 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1641 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1642 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1643 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1644
1645 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1646 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1647 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1648 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1649 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1650 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1651
1652 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1653 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1654 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1655 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1656 compilation.
1657
1658 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1659 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1660 @section Evaluation
1661 @cindex Evaluation
1662
1663 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1664 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1665 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1666 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1667 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1668 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1669
1670 @menu
1671 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1672 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1673 @end menu
1674
1675 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1676 @ifnottex
1677 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1678 @end ifnottex
1679
1680 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1681 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1682 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1683 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1684 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1685 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1686 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1687 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1688 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1689
1690 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1691 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1692 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1693 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1694 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1695 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1696 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1697
1698 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1699 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1700 or else produce an error.
1701
1702 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1703 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1704 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1705 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1706 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1707
1708 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1709 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1710 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1711 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1712 expressions.
1713
1714 @need 1250
1715 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1716 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1717
1718 @smallexample
1719 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1720 @end smallexample
1721
1722 @noindent
1723 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1724
1725 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1726 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1727 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1728 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1729 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1730
1731 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1732 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1733 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1734 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1735 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1736
1737 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1738 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1739 expression, or inside the expression.
1740
1741 @need 800
1742 Here is another copy of the expression:
1743
1744 @smallexample
1745 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1746 @end smallexample
1747
1748 @noindent
1749 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1750 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1751 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1752 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1753 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1754 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1755 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1756
1757 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1758 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1759 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1760 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1761 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1762 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1763 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1764 see in the next section.
1765
1766 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1767 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1768 @section Variables
1769 @cindex Variables
1770
1771 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1772 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1773 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1774 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1775 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1776 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1777 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1778 @dfn{variable}.
1779
1780 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1781 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1782 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1783 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1784 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1785 ``great programming center''.
1786
1787 @ignore
1788 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1789 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1790 string; these are discussed later.)
1791 @end ignore
1792
1793 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1794 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1795 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1796 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1797 function definition, and vice-verse.
1798
1799 @menu
1800 * fill-column Example::
1801 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1802 without a function.
1803 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1804 @end menu
1805
1806 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1807 @ifnottex
1808 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1809 @end ifnottex
1810
1811 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1812 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1813 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1814 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1815 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1816 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1817 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1818 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1819 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1820
1821 @smallexample
1822 fill-column
1823 @end smallexample
1824
1825 @noindent
1826 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1827 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1828 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1829 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1830 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1831 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1832 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1833 the value is known.
1834
1835 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1836 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1837 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1838 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1839
1840 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1841 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1842 this.
1843
1844 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1845 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1846 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1847 @cindex Symbol without function error
1848 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1849
1850 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1851 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1852 not intend to use it as a function name.
1853
1854 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1855 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1856 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1857 Try evaluating this:
1858
1859 @smallexample
1860 (fill-column)
1861 @end smallexample
1862
1863 @need 1250
1864 @noindent
1865 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer
1866 that says:
1867
1868 @smallexample
1869 @group
1870 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1871 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1872 (fill-column)
1873 eval((fill-column))
1874 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1875 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1876 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1877 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1878 @end group
1879 @end smallexample
1880
1881 @noindent
1882 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1883 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1884
1885 @ignore
1886 @need 800
1887 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1888
1889 @smallexample
1890 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1891 @end smallexample
1892
1893 @noindent
1894 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1895 another key.)
1896 @end ignore
1897
1898 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1899 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1900 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1901 @cindex Symbol without value error
1902 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1903
1904 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1905 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1906 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1907 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1908 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1909
1910 @smallexample
1911 (+ 2 2)
1912 @end smallexample
1913
1914 @need 1500
1915 @noindent
1916 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1917 says:
1918
1919 @smallexample
1920 @group
1921 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1922 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1923 eval(+)
1924 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1925 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1926 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1927 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1928 @end group
1929 @end smallexample
1930
1931 @noindent
1932 (As with the other times we entered the debugger, you can quit by
1933 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1934
1935 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1936 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1937 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1938 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1939 have a definition.
1940
1941 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1942 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1943 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1944 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1945 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1946 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was the
1947 @code{+} by itself.
1948
1949 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1950 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1951 variable was void.
1952
1953 @ignore
1954 @need 800
1955 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1956
1957 @example
1958 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1959 @end example
1960
1961 @noindent
1962 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1963 @end ignore
1964
1965 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1966 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1967 @section Arguments
1968 @cindex Arguments
1969 @cindex Passing information to functions
1970
1971 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1972 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1973 as follows:
1974
1975 @smallexample
1976 (+ 2 2)
1977 @end smallexample
1978
1979 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1980 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1981 the @code{+}.
1982
1983 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1984 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1985 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1986 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1987
1988 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1989 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1990 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1991 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1992 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1993 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1994 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1995 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1996 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1997 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1998 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1999 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
2000 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
2001 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
2002 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
2003 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
2004 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
2005 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
2006 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
2007
2008 @menu
2009 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
2010 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2011 of a variable or list.
2012 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2013 variable number of arguments.
2014 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2015 to a function.
2016 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2017 @end menu
2018
2019 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2020 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2021 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2022 @cindex Data types
2023 @cindex Types of data
2024 @cindex Arguments' data types
2025
2026 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2027 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2028 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2029 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2030
2031 @need 1250
2032 @findex concat
2033 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2034 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2035 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2036 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2037 following:
2038
2039 @smallexample
2040 (concat "abc" "def")
2041 @end smallexample
2042
2043 @noindent
2044 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2045
2046 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2047 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2048 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2049 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2050 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2051 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2052 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
2053
2054 @need 800
2055 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2056
2057 @smallexample
2058 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2059 @end smallexample
2060
2061 @noindent
2062 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2063 string and the two numbers.
2064
2065 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2066 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2067 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2068 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2069 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2070 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2071 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2072 atom such as a number or symbol.
2073
2074 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2075 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2076 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2077
2078 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2079 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2080 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2081
2082 @need 1250
2083 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2084 C-e}:
2085
2086 @smallexample
2087 (+ 2 fill-column)
2088 @end smallexample
2089
2090 @noindent
2091 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2092 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2093 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2094
2095 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2096 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2097 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2098 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2099 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2100 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2101
2102 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2103 @smallexample
2104 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2105 @end smallexample
2106
2107 @noindent
2108 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2109 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2110 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2111 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2112 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2113 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2114 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2115
2116 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2117 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2118 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2119 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2120 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2121
2122 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2123 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2124 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2125 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2126 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2127
2128 @need 1250
2129 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2130
2131 @smallexample
2132 @group
2133 (+) @result{} 0
2134
2135 (*) @result{} 1
2136 @end group
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @need 1250
2140 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2141
2142 @smallexample
2143 @group
2144 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2145
2146 (* 3) @result{} 3
2147 @end group
2148 @end smallexample
2149
2150 @need 1250
2151 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2152
2153 @smallexample
2154 @group
2155 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2156
2157 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2158 @end group
2159 @end smallexample
2160
2161 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2162 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2163 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2164 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2165 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2166
2167 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2168 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2169 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2170 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2171 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2172 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2173
2174 @smallexample
2175 (+ 2 'hello)
2176 @end smallexample
2177
2178 @noindent
2179 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2180 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2181 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2182 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2183 could not carry out its addition.
2184
2185 @need 1250
2186 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create and enter a
2187 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2188
2189 @noindent
2190 @smallexample
2191 @group
2192 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2193 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2194 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2195 +(2 hello)
2196 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2197 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2198 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2199 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2200 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2201 @end group
2202 @end smallexample
2203
2204 @need 1250
2205 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2206 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2207 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2208
2209 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2210 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2211 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2212 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2213
2214 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2215 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2216 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2217 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2218 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2219 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2220 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2221 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2222 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2223 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2224 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2225 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2226
2227 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2228 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2229 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2230 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2231 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2232 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2233 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2234 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2235 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2236 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2237
2238 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2239 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2240 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2241 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2242 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2243
2244 @ignore
2245 @need 1250
2246 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2247 message that says:
2248
2249 @smallexample
2250 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2251 @end smallexample
2252
2253 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2254 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2255 @end ignore
2256
2257 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2258 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2259 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2260 @findex message
2261
2262 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2263 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2264 that we will describe it here.
2265
2266 @need 1250
2267 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2268 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2269
2270 @smallexample
2271 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2272 @end smallexample
2273
2274 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2275 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2276 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2277 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2278 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2279 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2280 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2281 detail}, for an example of this.)
2282
2283 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2284 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2285 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2286 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2287 @samp{%s} is.
2288
2289 @need 1250
2290 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2291 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2292
2293 @smallexample
2294 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @noindent
2298 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2299 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2300 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2301 of @code{%s}.
2302
2303 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2304 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2305 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2306
2307 @smallexample
2308 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2309 @end smallexample
2310
2311 @noindent
2312 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2313 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2314 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2315 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2316 anything that is not a number.}.
2317
2318 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2319 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2320 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2321 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2322
2323 @need 1250
2324 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2325
2326 @smallexample
2327 @group
2328 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2329 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2330 @end group
2331 @end smallexample
2332
2333 @noindent
2334 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2335 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2336
2337 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2338 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2339 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2340 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2341 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2342
2343 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2344 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2345 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2346 for @samp{%s}:
2347
2348 @smallexample
2349 @group
2350 (message "He saw %d %s"
2351 (- fill-column 32)
2352 (concat "red "
2353 (substring
2354 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2355 " leaping."))
2356 @end group
2357 @end smallexample
2358
2359 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2360 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2361 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2362 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2363 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2364 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2365
2366 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2367 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2368 area.
2369
2370 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2371 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2372 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2373 @cindex Variable, setting value
2374 @cindex Setting value of variable
2375
2376 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2377 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2378 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2379 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2380 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2381
2382 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2383 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2384
2385 @menu
2386 * Using set:: Setting values.
2387 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2388 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2389 @end menu
2390
2391 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2392 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2393 @subsection Using @code{set}
2394 @findex set
2395
2396 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2397 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2398 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2399
2400 @smallexample
2401 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2402 @end smallexample
2403
2404 @noindent
2405 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2406 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2407 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2408 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2409 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2410 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2411 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2412 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2413 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2414
2415 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2416 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2417 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2418
2419 @smallexample
2420 flowers
2421 @end smallexample
2422
2423 @noindent
2424 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2425 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2426
2427 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2428 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2429 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2430
2431 @smallexample
2432 'flowers
2433 @end smallexample
2434
2435 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2436 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2437 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2438 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2439 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2440 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2441 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2442 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2443 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2444 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2445 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2446 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2447
2448 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2449 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2450 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2451 @findex setq
2452
2453 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2454 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2455 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2456 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2457 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2458 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2459 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2460
2461 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2462 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2463 is used:
2464
2465 @smallexample
2466 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2467 @end smallexample
2468
2469 @noindent
2470 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2471 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2472 means @code{quote}.)
2473
2474 @need 1250
2475 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2476
2477 @smallexample
2478 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2479 @end smallexample
2480
2481 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2482 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2483 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2484 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2485 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2486 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2487
2488 @smallexample
2489 @group
2490 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2491 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2492 @end group
2493 @end smallexample
2494
2495 @noindent
2496 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2497 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2498 formatted lists.)
2499
2500 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2501 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2502 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2503 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2504 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2505 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2506 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2507 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2508
2509 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2510 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2511 @subsection Counting
2512 @cindex Counting
2513
2514 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2515 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2516 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2517 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2518 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2519 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2520 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2521 evaluated.
2522
2523 @smallexample
2524 @group
2525 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2526
2527 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2528
2529 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2530 @end group
2531 @end smallexample
2532
2533 @noindent
2534 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2535 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2536
2537 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2538 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2539 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2540 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2541 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2542 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2543 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2544 the counter will be incremented.
2545
2546 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2547 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2548 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2549 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2550 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2551 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2552 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2553 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2554 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2555
2556 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2557 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2558 @section Summary
2559
2560 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2561 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2562 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2563
2564 @need 1000
2565 In summary,
2566
2567 @itemize @bullet
2568
2569 @item
2570 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2571
2572 @item
2573 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2574 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2575
2576 @item
2577 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2578 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2579 quotation marks, or numbers.
2580
2581 @item
2582 A number evaluates to itself.
2583
2584 @item
2585 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2586
2587 @item
2588 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2589
2590 @item
2591 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2592 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2593 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2594
2595 @item
2596 A single quotation mark,
2597 @ifinfo
2598 '
2599 @end ifinfo
2600 @ifnotinfo
2601 @code{'}
2602 @end ifnotinfo
2603 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2604 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2605 would if the quote were not there.
2606
2607 @item
2608 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2609 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2610 of which the function is the first element.
2611
2612 @item
2613 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2614 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2615 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2616 create a side effect.
2617 @end itemize
2618
2619 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2620 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2621 @section Exercises
2622
2623 A few simple exercises:
2624
2625 @itemize @bullet
2626 @item
2627 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2628 not within parentheses.
2629
2630 @item
2631 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2632 between parentheses.
2633
2634 @item
2635 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2636
2637 @item
2638 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2639 evaluated.
2640 @end itemize
2641
2642 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2643 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2644 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2645 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2646 @cindex Evaluation practice
2647
2648 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2649 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2650 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2651 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2652 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2653 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2654 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2655 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2656
2657 @menu
2658 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2659 causes evaluation.
2660 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2661 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2662 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2663 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2664 the buffer.
2665 * Evaluation Exercise::
2666 @end menu
2667
2668 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2669 @ifnottex
2670 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2671 @end ifnottex
2672
2673 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2674 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2675 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2676 how Emacs works.}
2677
2678 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2679 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2680 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2681 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2682 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2683 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2684 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2685 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2686 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2687 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2688
2689 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2690 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2691 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2692 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2693 will be described as we come to them.
2694
2695 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2696 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2697 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2698 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2699
2700 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2701 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2702 @section Buffer Names
2703 @findex buffer-name
2704 @findex buffer-file-name
2705
2706 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2707 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2708 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2709 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2710 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2711 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2712 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2713 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2714
2715 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2716 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2717 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2718 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2719 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2720 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2721 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2722 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2723 and is thus saved permanently.
2724
2725 @need 1250
2726 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2727 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2728 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2729
2730 @example
2731 @group
2732 (buffer-name)
2733
2734 (buffer-file-name)
2735 @end group
2736 @end example
2737
2738 @noindent
2739 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2740 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2741 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2742
2743 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2744 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2745 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2746 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2747 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2748
2749 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2750 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2751 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2752 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2753 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2754 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2755 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2756 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2757
2758 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2759 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2760 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2761
2762 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2763 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2764 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2765 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2766
2767 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2768 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2769 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2770 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2771 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2772 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2773 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2774
2775 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2776 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2777 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2778 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2779 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2780 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2781 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2782 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2783 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2784 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2785 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2786 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2787 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2788 and cultural center in its own right.
2789
2790 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2791 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2792 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2793
2794 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2795 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2796 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2797 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2798 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2799 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2800
2801 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2802 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2803 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2804 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2805 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2806 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2807 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2808 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2809
2810 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2811 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2812 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2813 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2814 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2815
2816 @smallexample
2817 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2818 @end smallexample
2819
2820 @noindent
2821 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2822 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2823 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2824 this book), this feature is very useful.
2825
2826 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2827 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2828 @section Getting Buffers
2829 @findex current-buffer
2830 @findex other-buffer
2831 @cindex Getting a buffer
2832
2833 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2834 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2835 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2836 you get is the buffer itself.
2837
2838 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2839 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2840 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2841 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2842 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2843 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2844 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2845 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2846 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2847 @code{current-buffer}.
2848
2849 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2850 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2851 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2852 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2853 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2854 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2855 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2856
2857 @need 800
2858 Here is an expression containing the function:
2859
2860 @smallexample
2861 (current-buffer)
2862 @end smallexample
2863
2864 @noindent
2865 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2866 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2867 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2868 just its name.
2869
2870 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2871 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2872 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2873
2874 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2875 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2876 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2877 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2878 will return that buffer.
2879
2880 @need 800
2881 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2882
2883 @smallexample
2884 (other-buffer)
2885 @end smallexample
2886
2887 @noindent
2888 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2889 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2890 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2891 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2892 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2893 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2894
2895 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2896 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2897 @section Switching Buffers
2898 @findex switch-to-buffer
2899 @findex set-buffer
2900 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2901
2902 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2903 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2904 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2905 different buffer.
2906
2907 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2908 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2909 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2910 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2911 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2912 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2913 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2914 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2915 your @kbd{RET} key.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2916 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2917 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2918 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2919 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2920 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2921 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2922
2923 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2924 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2925 does.
2926
2927 @need 1000
2928 Here is the Lisp expression:
2929
2930 @smallexample
2931 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2932 @end smallexample
2933
2934 @noindent
2935 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2936 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2937 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2938 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2939 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2940 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2941 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2942 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2943 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2944 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2945 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2946 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2947 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2948 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2949 following more complex expression:
2950
2951 @smallexample
2952 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2953 @end smallexample
2954
2955 @c noindent
2956 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2957 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2958 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2959 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2960 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2961 to go to another visible buffer.}
2962
2963 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2964 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2965 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2966 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2967 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2968 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2969 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2970 not need to be visible on the screen.
2971
2972 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2973 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2974 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2975 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2976 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2977 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2978 there until the command finishes running).
2979
2980 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2981 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2982 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2983 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2984 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2985 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2986 or her.
2987
2988 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2989 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2990 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2991 @cindex Size of buffer
2992 @cindex Buffer size
2993 @cindex Point location
2994 @cindex Location of point
2995
2996 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2997 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2998 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2999 the location of point within it.
3000
3001 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
3002 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
3003 characters in the buffer.
3004
3005 @smallexample
3006 (buffer-size)
3007 @end smallexample
3008
3009 @noindent
3010 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3011 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3012
3013 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3014 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3015 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3016 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3017 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3018
3019 @need 1250
3020 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3021 the following expression in the usual way:
3022
3023 @smallexample
3024 (point)
3025 @end smallexample
3026
3027 @noindent
3028 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3029 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3030 book.
3031
3032 @need 1250
3033 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3034 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3035
3036 @smallexample
3037 (point)
3038 @end smallexample
3039
3040 @noindent
3041 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3042 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3043 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3044 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3045
3046 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3047 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3048 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3049 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3050 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3051 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3052 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3053 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3054 value of point in the current buffer.
3055
3056 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3057 @section Exercise
3058
3059 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3060 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3061
3062 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3063 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3064 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3065 @cindex Definition writing
3066 @cindex Function definition writing
3067 @cindex Writing a function definition
3068
3069 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3070 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3071 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3072 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3073 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3074 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3075 symbol refers to it.)
3076
3077 @menu
3078 * Primitive Functions::
3079 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3080 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3081 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3082 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3083 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3084 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3085 * if:: What if?
3086 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3087 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3088 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3089 * Review::
3090 * defun Exercises::
3091 @end menu
3092
3093 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3094 @ifnottex
3095 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3096 @end ifnottex
3097 @cindex Primitive functions
3098 @cindex Functions, primitive
3099
3100 @cindex C language primitives
3101 @cindex Primitives written in C
3102 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3103 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3104 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3105 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3106 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3107 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3108 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3109 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3110 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3111
3112 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3113 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3114 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3115 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3116 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3117 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3118
3119 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3120 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3121 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3122 @findex defun
3123 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3124
3125 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3126 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3127 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3128 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3129 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3130 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3131 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3132 called a @dfn{special form}.
3133
3134 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3135 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3136 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3137 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3138 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3139 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3140 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3141 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3142
3143 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3144 @code{defun}:
3145
3146 @enumerate
3147 @item
3148 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3149 attached.
3150
3151 @item
3152 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3153 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3154 @code{()}.
3155
3156 @item
3157 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3158 strongly recommended.)
3159
3160 @item
3161 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3162 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3163 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3164
3165 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3166 @item
3167 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3168 function definition.
3169 @end enumerate
3170
3171 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3172 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3173
3174 @smallexample
3175 @group
3176 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3177 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3178 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3179 @var{body}@dots{})
3180 @end group
3181 @end smallexample
3182
3183 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3184 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3185 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3186
3187 @smallexample
3188 @group
3189 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3190 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3191 (* 7 number))
3192 @end group
3193 @end smallexample
3194
3195 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3196 followed by the name of the function.
3197
3198 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3199 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3200 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3201 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3202 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3203 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3204 function.
3205
3206 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3207 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3208 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3209 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3210 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3211 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3212 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3213 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3214 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3215 the function clear.
3216
3217 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3218 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3219 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3220 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3221 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3222 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3223 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3224 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3225 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3226 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3227 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3228 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3229
3230 @ignore
3231 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3232 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3233 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3234 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3235 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3236 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3237 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3238 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3239 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3240 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3241 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3242 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3243 @end ignore
3244
3245 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3246 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3247 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3248 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3249 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3250 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3251 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3252 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3253 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3254 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3255 write.
3256
3257 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3258 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3259 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3260 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3261 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3262 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3263 function for addition.)
3264
3265 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3266 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3267 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3268 to evaluate this yet!
3269
3270 @smallexample
3271 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3272 @end smallexample
3273
3274 @noindent
3275 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3276 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3277 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3278 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3279 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3280 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3281 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3282 definition begins.
3283
3284 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3285 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3286 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3287 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3288 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3289 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3290 section.
3291
3292 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3293 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3294 @section Install a Function Definition
3295 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3296 @cindex Definition installation
3297 @cindex Function definition installation
3298
3299 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3300 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3301 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3302 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3303 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3304 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3305 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3306 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3307 action installs the function definition.
3308
3309 @smallexample
3310 @group
3311 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3312 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3313 (* 7 number))
3314 @end group
3315 @end smallexample
3316
3317 @noindent
3318 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3319 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3320 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3321 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3322 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3323 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3324
3325 @menu
3326 * Effect of installation::
3327 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3328 @end menu
3329
3330 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3331 @ifnottex
3332 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3333 @end ifnottex
3334
3335 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3336 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3337 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3338 echo area.
3339
3340 @smallexample
3341 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3342 @end smallexample
3343
3344 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3345 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3346 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3347 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3348
3349 @smallexample
3350 @group
3351 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3352 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3353
3354 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3355 @end group
3356 @end smallexample
3357
3358 @noindent
3359 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3360
3361 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3362 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3363 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3364 @cindex Changing a function definition
3365 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3366 @cindex Definition, how to change
3367
3368 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3369 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3370 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3371 very simple.
3372
3373 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3374 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3375 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3376 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3377 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3378 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3379 version''.
3380
3381 @smallexample
3382 @group
3383 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3384 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3385 (+ number number number number number number number))
3386 @end group
3387 @end smallexample
3388
3389 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3390 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3391 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3392 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3393 each line with a semicolon.
3394
3395 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3396 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3397 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3398
3399 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3400 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3401 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3402
3403 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3404 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3405 install it again.
3406
3407 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3408 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3409 @section Make a Function Interactive
3410 @cindex Interactive functions
3411 @findex interactive
3412
3413 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3414 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3415 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3416 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3417 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3418 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3419
3420 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3421 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3422 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3423 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3424 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3425 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3426
3427 @menu
3428 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3429 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3430 @end menu
3431
3432 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3433 @ifnottex
3434 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3435 @end ifnottex
3436
3437 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3438 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3439 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3440
3441 @need 1250
3442 Here is the code:
3443
3444 @smallexample
3445 @group
3446 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3447 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3448 (interactive "p")
3449 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3450 @end group
3451 @end smallexample
3452
3453 @noindent
3454 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3455 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3456 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3457 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3458 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3459 echo area.
3460
3461 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3462 ways:
3463
3464 @enumerate
3465 @item
3466 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3467 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3468 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3469
3470 @item
3471 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3472 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3473 @end enumerate
3474
3475 @noindent
3476 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3477 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3478 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3479
3480 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3481 to a key.)
3482
3483 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3484 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3485 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3486 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3487
3488 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3489 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3490 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3491
3492 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3493 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3494 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3495 looks like this:
3496
3497 @smallexample
3498 @group
3499 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3500 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3501 (interactive "p")
3502 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3503 @end group
3504 @end smallexample
3505
3506 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3507 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3508 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3509
3510 @need 1000
3511 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3512 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3513
3514 @smallexample
3515 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3516 @end smallexample
3517
3518 @need 1250
3519 @noindent
3520 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3521 evaluate the line as if it were:
3522
3523 @smallexample
3524 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3525 @end smallexample
3526
3527 @noindent
3528 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3529 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3530 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3531 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3532 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3533
3534 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3535 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3536 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3537 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3538 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3539 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3540 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3541 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3542 sequence is located.
3543
3544 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3545 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3546 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3547 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3548 is 35}.
3549
3550 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3551 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3552 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3553 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3554 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3555 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3556 quotes.)
3557
3558 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3559 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3560 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3561 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3562 @cindex Interactive options
3563
3564 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3565 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3566 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3567 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3568 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3569 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3570 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3571 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3572 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3573
3574 @need 1250
3575 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3576 is
3577
3578 @smallexample
3579 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3580 @end smallexample
3581
3582 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3583 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3584 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3585 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3586 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3587 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3588 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3589 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3590 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3591 character, but no more.
3592
3593 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3594
3595 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3596 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3597 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3598 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3599 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3600 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3601 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3602 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3603 is one) and the character.
3604
3605 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3606 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3607 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3608
3609 @smallexample
3610 @group
3611 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3612 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3613 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3614 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3615 @end group
3616 @end smallexample
3617
3618 @noindent
3619 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3620 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3621 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3622
3623 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3624 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3625 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3626 this.
3627
3628 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3629 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3630 a list.
3631
3632 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3633 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3634 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3635 explanation about this technique.
3636
3637 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3638 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3639 @section Install Code Permanently
3640 @cindex Install code permanently
3641 @cindex Permanent code installation
3642 @cindex Code installation
3643
3644 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3645 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3646 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3647 function definition again.
3648
3649 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3650 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3651 doing this:
3652
3653 @itemize @bullet
3654 @item
3655 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3656 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3657 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3658 the function definitions within it are installed.
3659 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3660
3661 @item
3662 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3663 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3664 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3665 functions in the files.
3666 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3667
3668 @item
3669 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3670 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3671 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3672 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3673 distribution.)
3674 @end itemize
3675
3676 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3677 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3678 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3679 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3680 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3681 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3682 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3683 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3684 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3685
3686 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3687 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3688 @section @code{let}
3689 @findex let
3690
3691 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3692 to use in most function definitions.
3693
3694 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3695 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3696 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3697
3698 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3699 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3700 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3701 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3702 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3703 different house.
3704
3705 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3706 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3707 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3708 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3709 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3710 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3711
3712 @menu
3713 * Prevent confusion::
3714 * Parts of let Expression::
3715 * Sample let Expression::
3716 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3717 @end menu
3718
3719 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3720 @ifnottex
3721 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3722 @end ifnottex
3723
3724 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3725 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3726 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3727 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3728 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3729 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3730 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3731 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3732
3733 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3734 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3735 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3736 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3737
3738 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3739 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3740 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3741 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3742 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3743 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3744 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3745
3746 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3747 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3748 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3749 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3750 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3751 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3752 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3753 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3754 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3755 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3756 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3757
3758 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3759 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3760 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3761 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3762 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3763
3764 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3765 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3766 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3767 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3768 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3769 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3770 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3771
3772 @need 800
3773 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3774
3775 @smallexample
3776 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3777 @end smallexample
3778
3779 @noindent
3780 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3781 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3782 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3783 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3784 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3785
3786 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3787 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3788 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3789 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3790
3791 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3792 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3793 template.
3794
3795 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3796 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3797
3798 @smallexample
3799 @group
3800 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3801 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3802 @dots{})
3803 @var{body}@dots{})
3804 @end group
3805 @end smallexample
3806
3807 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3809 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3810 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3811 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3812
3813 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3814 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3815 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3816
3817 @smallexample
3818 @group
3819 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3820 (tiger 'fierce))
3821 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3822 zebra tiger))
3823 @end group
3824 @end smallexample
3825
3826 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3827
3828 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3829 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3830 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3831 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3832 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3833 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3834 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3835 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3836 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3837 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3838 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3839 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3840 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3841 in the echo area.
3842
3843 @need 1500
3844 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3845 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3846 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3847
3848 @smallexample
3849 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3850 @end smallexample
3851
3852 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3853 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3854 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3855 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3856 second @samp{%s}.
3857
3858 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3859 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3860 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3861 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3862 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3863
3864 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3865 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3866 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3867
3868 @smallexample
3869 @group
3870 (let ((birch 3)
3871 pine
3872 fir
3873 (oak 'some))
3874 (message
3875 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3876 birch pine fir oak))
3877 @end group
3878 @end smallexample
3879
3880 @noindent
3881 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3882
3883 @need 1250
3884 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3885 appear in your echo area:
3886
3887 @smallexample
3888 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3889 @end smallexample
3890
3891 @noindent
3892 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3893 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3894 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3895
3896 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3897 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3898 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3899 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3900 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3901 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3902 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3903 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3904 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3905 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3906
3907 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3908 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3909 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3910 @findex if
3911 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3912
3913 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3914 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3915 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3916 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3917 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3918 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3919
3920 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3921 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3922 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3923 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3924
3925 @menu
3926 * if in more detail::
3927 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3928 @end menu
3929
3930 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3931 @ifnottex
3932 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3933 @end ifnottex
3934
3935 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3936 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3937 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3938 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3939 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3940 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3941 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3942
3943 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3944 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3945 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3946 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3947 expression easier to read.
3948
3949 @smallexample
3950 @group
3951 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3952 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3953 @end group
3954 @end smallexample
3955
3956 @noindent
3957 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3958 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3959
3960 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3961 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3962 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3963
3964 @smallexample
3965 @group
3966 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3967 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3968 @end group
3969 @end smallexample
3970
3971 @noindent
3972 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3973 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3974 @findex > (greater than)
3975
3976 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3977 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3978 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3979 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3980 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3981
3982 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3983 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3984 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3985 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3986 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3987
3988 @smallexample
3989 @group
3990 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3991 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3992 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3993 then warn of a tiger."
3994 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3995 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3996 @end group
3997 @end smallexample
3998
3999 @need 1500
4000 @noindent
4001 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
4002 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
4003 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
4004
4005 @smallexample
4006 @group
4007 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4008
4009 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4010
4011 @end group
4012 @end smallexample
4013
4014 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4015 @noindent
4016 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4017 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4018 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4019 printed in the echo area.
4020
4021 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4022 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4023 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4024
4025 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4026
4027 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4028 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4029 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4030
4031 @need 1250
4032 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4033
4034 @smallexample
4035 @group
4036 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4037 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4038 @var{body}@dots{})
4039 @end group
4040 @end smallexample
4041
4042 @need 800
4043 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4044
4045 @smallexample
4046 @group
4047 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4048 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4049 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4050 then warn of a tiger."
4051 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4052 @end group
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4056 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4057 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4058 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4059 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4060 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4061
4062 @need 800
4063 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4064
4065 @smallexample
4066 @group
4067 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4068 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4069 @end group
4070 @end smallexample
4071
4072 @need 1250
4073 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4074 looks like this:
4075
4076 @smallexample
4077 @group
4078 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4079 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4080 @end group
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 @need 800
4084 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4085
4086 @smallexample
4087 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4088 @end smallexample
4089
4090 @noindent
4091 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4092 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4093 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4094 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4095 this function.
4096
4097 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4098 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4099 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4100 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4101 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4102 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4103
4104 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4105 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4106 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4107 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4108
4109 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4110 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4111 @section If--then--else Expressions
4112 @cindex Else
4113
4114 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4115 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4116 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4117 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4118 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4119 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4120 the beach, else read a book!''.
4121
4122 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4123 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4124 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4125 indented less than the then-part:
4126
4127 @smallexample
4128 @group
4129 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4130 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4131 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4132 @end group
4133 @end smallexample
4134
4135 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4136 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4137
4138 @smallexample
4139 @group
4140 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4141 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4142 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4143 @end group
4144 @end smallexample
4145
4146 @noindent
4147 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4148 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4149 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4150 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4151
4152 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4153 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4154 expression.
4155
4156 @need 1500
4157 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4158 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4159 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4160 arguments to the function.
4161
4162 @smallexample
4163 @group
4164 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4165 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4166 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4167 then warn of a tiger;
4168 else say it's not fierce."
4169 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4170 (message "It's a tiger!")
4171 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4172 @end group
4173 @end smallexample
4174 @sp 1
4175
4176 @smallexample
4177 @group
4178 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4179
4180 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4181
4182 @end group
4183 @end smallexample
4184
4185 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4186 @noindent
4187 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4188 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4189 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4190 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4191
4192 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4193 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4194 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4195 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4196 and write your program accordingly.)
4197
4198 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4199 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4200 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4201 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4202 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4203 @findex nil
4204
4205 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4206 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4207 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4208 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4209 at all---is `true'.
4210
4211 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4212 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4213 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4214 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4215 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4216 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4217
4218 @menu
4219 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4220 @end menu
4221
4222 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4223 @ifnottex
4224 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4225 @end ifnottex
4226
4227 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4228
4229 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4230 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4231 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4232 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4233 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4234 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4235
4236 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4237 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4238 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4239 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4240 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4241 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4242 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4243 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4244
4245 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4246
4247 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4248 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4249 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4250 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4251 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4252 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4253
4254 @smallexample
4255 @group
4256 (if 4
4257 'true
4258 'false)
4259 @end group
4260
4261 @group
4262 (if nil
4263 'true
4264 'false)
4265 @end group
4266 @end smallexample
4267
4268 @need 1250
4269 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4270 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4271 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4272 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4273
4274 @smallexample
4275 (> 5 4)
4276 @end smallexample
4277
4278 @need 1250
4279 @noindent
4280 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4281
4282 @smallexample
4283 (> 4 5)
4284 @end smallexample
4285
4286 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4287 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4288 @section @code{save-excursion}
4289 @findex save-excursion
4290 @cindex Region, what it is
4291 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4292 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4293 @findex point
4294 @findex mark
4295
4296 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4297 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4298
4299 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4300 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4301 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4302 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4303 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4304 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4305
4306 @menu
4307 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4308 * Template for save-excursion::
4309 @end menu
4310
4311 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4312 @ifnottex
4313 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4314 @end ifnottex
4315
4316 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4317 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4318 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4319 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4320 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4321 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4322 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4323 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4324 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4325
4326 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4327 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4328 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4329 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4330 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4331 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4332 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4333 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4334 times.
4335
4336 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4337 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4338 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4339 @code{print-region}.
4340
4341 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4342 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4343 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4344 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4345 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4346 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4347 evaluated.
4348
4349 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4350 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4351 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4352 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4353 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4354 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4355 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4356
4357 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4358 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4359 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4360 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4361
4362 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4363 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4364 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4365 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4366 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4367 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4368
4369 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4370 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4371 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4372
4373 @need 800
4374 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4375
4376 @smallexample
4377 @group
4378 (save-excursion
4379 @var{body}@dots{})
4380 @end group
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 @noindent
4384 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4385 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4386 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4387 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4388 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4389 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4390 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4391
4392 @need 1250
4393 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4394 looks like this:
4395
4396 @smallexample
4397 @group
4398 (save-excursion
4399 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4400 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4401 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4402 @dots{}
4403 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4404 @end group
4405 @end smallexample
4406
4407 @noindent
4408 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4409
4410 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4411 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4412
4413 @smallexample
4414 @group
4415 (let @var{varlist}
4416 (save-excursion
4417 @var{body}@dots{}))
4418 @end group
4419 @end smallexample
4420
4421 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4422 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4423 @section Review
4424
4425 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4426 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4427 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4428
4429 @table @code
4430 @item eval-last-sexp
4431 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4432 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4433 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4434 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4435
4436 @item defun
4437 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4438 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4439 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4440 definition.
4441
4442 @need 1250
4443 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4444 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4445 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4446
4447 @smallexample
4448 @group
4449 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4450 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4451 (interactive)
4452 (beginning-of-line 1)
4453 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4454 @end group
4455 @end smallexample
4456
4457 @ignore
4458 In GNU Emacs 22,
4459
4460 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4461 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4462 (interactive "p")
4463 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4464 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4465
4466 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4467 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4468 (interactive)
4469 (beginning-of-line 1)
4470 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4471 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4472 (backward-prefix-chars))
4473 @end ignore
4474
4475 @item interactive
4476 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4477 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4478 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4479 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4480 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4481 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4482
4483 @need 1000
4484 Common code characters are:
4485
4486 @table @code
4487 @item b
4488 The name of an existing buffer.
4489
4490 @item f
4491 The name of an existing file.
4492
4493 @item p
4494 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4495
4496 @item r
4497 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4498 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4499 rather than one.
4500 @end table
4501
4502 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4503 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4504 code characters.
4505
4506 @item let
4507 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4508 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4509 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4510 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4511 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4512 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4513 @code{let}.
4514
4515 @need 1250
4516 For example,
4517
4518 @smallexample
4519 @group
4520 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4521 (bar (buffer-size)))
4522 (message
4523 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4524 foo bar))
4525 @end group
4526 @end smallexample
4527
4528 @item save-excursion
4529 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4530 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4531 and mark and buffer afterward.
4532
4533 @need 1250
4534 For example,
4535
4536 @smallexample
4537 @group
4538 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4539 (- (point)
4540 (save-excursion
4541 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4542 @end group
4543 @end smallexample
4544
4545 @item if
4546 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4547 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4548
4549 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4550 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4551 commonly used.
4552
4553 @need 1250
4554 For example,
4555
4556 @smallexample
4557 @group
4558 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4559 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4560 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4561 @end group
4562 @end smallexample
4563
4564 @need 1250
4565 @item <
4566 @itemx >
4567 @itemx <=
4568 @itemx >=
4569 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4570 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4571 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4572 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4573 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4574 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4575 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4576
4577 @need 800
4578 @item =
4579 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4580 markers, are equal.
4581
4582 @need 1250
4583 @item equal
4584 @itemx eq
4585 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4586 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4587 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4588 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4589 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4590 @findex equal
4591 @findex eq
4592
4593 @need 1250
4594 @item string<
4595 @itemx string-lessp
4596 @itemx string=
4597 @itemx string-equal
4598 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4599 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4600 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4601
4602 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4603 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4604 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4605
4606 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4607 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4608 smaller than any string of characters.
4609
4610 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4611 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4612 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4613
4614 @item message
4615 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4616 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4617 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4618 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4619 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4620 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4621 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4622
4623 @item setq
4624 @itemx set
4625 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4626 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4627 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4628 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4629 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4630 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4631
4632 @item buffer-name
4633 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4634
4635 @itemx buffer-file-name
4636 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4637 visiting.
4638
4639 @item current-buffer
4640 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4641 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4642
4643 @item other-buffer
4644 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4645 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4646 buffer).
4647
4648 @item switch-to-buffer
4649 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4650 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4651
4652 @item set-buffer
4653 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4654 alter what the window is showing.
4655
4656 @item buffer-size
4657 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4658
4659 @item point
4660 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4661 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4662 buffer.
4663
4664 @item point-min
4665 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4666 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4667
4668 @item point-max
4669 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4670 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4671 effect.
4672 @end table
4673
4674 @need 1500
4675 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4676 @section Exercises
4677
4678 @itemize @bullet
4679 @item
4680 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4681 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4682
4683 @item
4684 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4685 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4686 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4687 @end itemize
4688
4689 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4690 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4691 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4692
4693 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4694 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4695 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4696 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4697 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4698 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4699 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4700
4701 @menu
4702 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4703 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4704 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4705 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4706 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4707 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4708 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4709 * Buffer Exercises::
4710 @end menu
4711
4712 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4713 @section Finding More Information
4714
4715 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4716 @cindex Find function documentation
4717 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4718 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4719 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4720 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4721 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4722 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4723 then @key{RET}).
4724
4725 @cindex Find source of function
4726 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4727 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4728 function definition.
4729
4730 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4731 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4732 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4733 you directly to the function definition.
4734
4735 @ignore
4736 Not In version 22
4737
4738 If you move point over the file name and press
4739 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4740 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4741 definition.
4742 @end ignore
4743
4744 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4745 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4746 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4747 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4748 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4749 Texinfo source file of this document.
4750 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4751 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4752 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4753
4754 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4755 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4756 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4757 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4758 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4759 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4760 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4761 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4762 @key{ALT}.)
4763
4764 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4765 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4766 @findex find-tag
4767 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4768 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4769 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4770 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4771 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4772 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4773 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4774 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4775 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4776 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4777
4778 @need 1250
4779 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4780 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4781 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4782 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4783
4784 @smallexample
4785 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4786 @end smallexample
4787
4788 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4789
4790 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4791 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4792 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4793
4794 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4795 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4796 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4797 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4798 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4799 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4800 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4801 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4802 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4803 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4804 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4805 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4806 by topic keywords.''
4807
4808 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4810 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4811 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4812
4813 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4814 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4815 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4816 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4817 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4818
4819 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4820 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4821 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4822 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4823 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4824 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4825
4826 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4827 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4828 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4829 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4830 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4831 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4832 of the buffer.
4833
4834 @need 1250
4835 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4836
4837 @smallexample
4838 @group
4839 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4840 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4841 leave mark at previous position."
4842 (interactive)
4843 (push-mark)
4844 (goto-char (point-min)))
4845 @end group
4846 @end smallexample
4847
4848 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4849 the special form @code{defun}:
4850
4851 @enumerate
4852 @item
4853 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4854
4855 @item
4856 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4857
4858 @item
4859 The documentation string.
4860
4861 @item
4862 The interactive expression.
4863
4864 @item
4865 The body.
4866 @end enumerate
4867
4868 @noindent
4869 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4870 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4871 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4872 an optional argument.)
4873
4874 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4875 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4876 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4877 require one.
4878
4879 @need 800
4880 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4881
4882 @smallexample
4883 @group
4884 (push-mark)
4885 (goto-char (point-min))
4886 @end group
4887 @end smallexample
4888
4889 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4890 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4891 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4892 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4893
4894 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4895 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4896 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4897 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4898 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4899
4900 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4901 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4902 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4903 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4904
4905 That is all there is to the function definition!
4906
4907 @findex describe-function
4908 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4909 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4910 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4911 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4912 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4913 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4914 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4915
4916 @smallexample
4917 @group
4918 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4919 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4920 @end group
4921 @end smallexample
4922
4923 @noindent
4924 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4925
4926 @noindent
4927 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4928 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4929 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4930 @key{RET}}.)
4931
4932 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4933 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4934 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4935 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4936
4937 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4938 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4939 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4940 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4941
4942 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4943 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4944 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4945
4946 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4947 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4948 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4949 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4950 h}.
4951
4952 @menu
4953 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4954 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4955 @end menu
4956
4957 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4958 @ifnottex
4959 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4960 @end ifnottex
4961
4962 @need 1250
4963 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4964
4965 @smallexample
4966 @group
4967 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4968 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4969 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4970 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4971 that uses or sets the mark."
4972 (interactive)
4973 (push-mark (point))
4974 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4975 (goto-char (point-min)))
4976 @end group
4977 @end smallexample
4978
4979 @need 1250
4980 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4981 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4982 this:
4983
4984 @smallexample
4985 @group
4986 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4987 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4988 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4989 @var{body}@dots{})
4990 @end group
4991 @end smallexample
4992
4993 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4994 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4995 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4996 The documentation comes next.
4997
4998 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4999 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
5000 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
5001 previous section.
5002
5003 @need 1250
5004 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
5005 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5006 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
5007
5008 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
5009 lines of code:
5010
5011 @c GNU Emacs 22
5012 @smallexample
5013 @group
5014 (push-mark (point))
5015 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5016 (goto-char (point-min))
5017 @end group
5018 @end smallexample
5019
5020 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5021
5022 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5023 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5024 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5025 at the current position of the cursor.
5026
5027 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5028 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5029 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5030 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5031 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5032 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5033 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5034 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5035 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5036 there.
5037
5038 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5039 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5040 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5041 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5042 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5043 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5044 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5045 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5046 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5047 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5048 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5049
5050 @need 1250
5051 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5052 The line reads
5053
5054 @smallexample
5055 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5056 @end smallexample
5057
5058 @noindent
5059 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5060 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5061 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5062 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5063 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5064 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5065 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5066 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5067 region. It is often turned off.
5068
5069 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5070 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5071 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5072 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5073 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5074 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5075 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5076 region.
5077
5078 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5079 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5080 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5081 @findex append-to-buffer
5082
5083 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5084 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5085 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5086 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5087
5088 @menu
5089 * append-to-buffer overview::
5090 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5091 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5092 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5093 @end menu
5094
5095 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5096 @ifnottex
5097 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5098 @end ifnottex
5099
5100 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5101 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5102 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5103 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5104 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5105 inserts them into another buffer.
5106
5107 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5108 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5109 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5110 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5111 to, and the region that will be copied.
5112
5113 @need 1250
5114 Here is the complete text of the function:
5115
5116 @smallexample
5117 @group
5118 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5119 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5120 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5121 @end group
5122
5123 @group
5124 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5125 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5126 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5127 (interactive
5128 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5129 (current-buffer) t))
5130 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5131 @end group
5132 @group
5133 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5134 (save-excursion
5135 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5136 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5137 point)
5138 (set-buffer append-to)
5139 (setq point (point))
5140 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5141 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5142 (dolist (window windows)
5143 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5144 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5145 @end group
5146 @end smallexample
5147
5148 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5149 filled-in templates.
5150
5151 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5152 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5153
5154 @smallexample
5155 @group
5156 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5157 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5158 (interactive @dots{})
5159 @var{body}@dots{})
5160 @end group
5161 @end smallexample
5162
5163 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5164 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5165 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5166 will be copied.
5167
5168 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5169 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5170 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5171 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5172
5173 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5174 name. (The function can handle either.)
5175
5176 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5177 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5178 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5179
5180 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5181 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5182 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5183 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5184
5185 @smallexample
5186 @group
5187 (interactive
5188 (list (read-buffer
5189 "Append to buffer: "
5190 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5191 (region-beginning)
5192 (region-end)))
5193 @end group
5194 @end smallexample
5195
5196 @noindent
5197 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5198 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5199
5200 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5201 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5202 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5203 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5204 provide if you don't specify anything.
5205
5206 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5207 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5208 for true.
5209
5210 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5211 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5212 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5213 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5214 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5215
5216 @need 1250
5217 The expression looks like this:
5218
5219 @smallexample
5220 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5221 @end smallexample
5222
5223 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5224 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5225 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5226
5227 @need 1250
5228 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5229 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5230
5231 @smallexample
5232 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 @noindent
5236 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5237 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5238
5239 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5240 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5241 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5242 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5243 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5244
5245 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5246 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5247 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5248
5249 @ignore
5250 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5251
5252 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5253 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5254 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5255
5256 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5257 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5258 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5259 (interactive
5260 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5261 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5262 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5263 (save-excursion
5264 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5265 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5266 point)
5267 (set-buffer append-to)
5268 (setq point (point))
5269 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5270 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5271 (dolist (window windows)
5272 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5273 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5274 @end ignore
5275
5276 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5277
5278 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5279 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5280 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5281 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5282 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5283
5284 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5285 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5286 @code{let} expression in outline:
5287
5288 @smallexample
5289 @group
5290 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5291 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5292 (interactive @dots{})
5293 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5294 @var{body}@dots{})
5295 @end group
5296 @end smallexample
5297
5298 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5299
5300 @enumerate
5301 @item
5302 The symbol @code{let};
5303
5304 @item
5305 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5306 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5307
5308 @item
5309 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5310 @end enumerate
5311
5312 @need 800
5313 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5314
5315 @smallexample
5316 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5317 @end smallexample
5318
5319 @noindent
5320 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5321 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5322 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5323 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5324 which you will copy.
5325
5326 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5327 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5328 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5329 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5330 The line looks like this:
5331
5332 @smallexample
5333 @group
5334 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5335 @dots{} )
5336 @end group
5337 @end smallexample
5338
5339 @noindent
5340 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5341 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5342 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5343 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5344
5345 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5346 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5347 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5348
5349 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5350 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5351
5352 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5353 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5354 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5355 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5356 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5357 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5358
5359 @need 1500
5360 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5361 @cindex Formatting convention
5362 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5363 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5364 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5365 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5366 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5367 this:
5368
5369 @smallexample
5370 @group
5371 (defun @dots{}
5372 @dots{}
5373 @dots{}
5374 (let@dots{}
5375 (save-excursion
5376 @dots{}
5377 @end group
5378 @end smallexample
5379
5380 @need 1500
5381 @noindent
5382 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5383 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5384 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5385 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5386 with the @code{let}:
5387
5388 @smallexample
5389 @group
5390 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5391 (save-excursion
5392 @dots{}
5393 (set-buffer @dots{})
5394 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5395 @dots{}))
5396 @end group
5397 @end smallexample
5398
5399 @need 1200
5400 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5401 of filling in the slots of a template:
5402
5403 @smallexample
5404 @group
5405 (save-excursion
5406 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5407 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5408 @dots{}
5409 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5410 @end group
5411 @end smallexample
5412
5413 @need 1200
5414 @noindent
5415 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5416 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5417 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5418 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5419 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5420
5421 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5422 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5423 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5424
5425 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5426 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5427 function.
5428
5429 @need 1250
5430 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5431
5432 @smallexample
5433 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5434 @end smallexample
5435
5436 @need 1250
5437 @noindent
5438 but now it is
5439
5440 @smallexample
5441 (set-buffer append-to)
5442 @end smallexample
5443
5444 @noindent
5445 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5446 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5447 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5448 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5449
5450 @ignore
5451 in GNU Emacs 22
5452
5453 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5454 (save-excursion
5455 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5456 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5457 point)
5458 (set-buffer append-to)
5459 (setq point (point))
5460 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5461 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5462 (dolist (window windows)
5463 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5464 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5465 @end ignore
5466
5467 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5468 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5469 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5470 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5471 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5472 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5473 @code{current-buffer}.
5474
5475 @need 1250
5476 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5477
5478 @smallexample
5479 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5480 @end smallexample
5481
5482 @noindent
5483 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5484 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5485 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5486 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5487 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5488 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5489 command.
5490
5491 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5492 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5493 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5494
5495 @need 800
5496 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5497
5498 @smallexample
5499 @group
5500 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5501 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5502 @var{change-buffer}
5503 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5504
5505 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5506 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5507 @end group
5508 @end smallexample
5509
5510 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5511 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5512 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5513 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5514 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5515 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5516
5517 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5518 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5519 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5520 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5521 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5522
5523 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5524 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5525 @section Review
5526
5527 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5528
5529 @table @code
5530 @item describe-function
5531 @itemx describe-variable
5532 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5533 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5534
5535 @item find-tag
5536 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5537 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5538 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5539 @key{META} key).
5540
5541 @item save-excursion
5542 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5543 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5544 the current buffer and return to it.
5545
5546 @item push-mark
5547 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5548 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5549 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5550
5551 @item goto-char
5552 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5553 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5554 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5555
5556 @item insert-buffer-substring
5557 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5558 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5559
5560 @item mark-whole-buffer
5561 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5562
5563 @item set-buffer
5564 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5565 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5566 to work on a different buffer.
5567
5568 @item get-buffer-create
5569 @itemx get-buffer
5570 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5571 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5572 buffer does not exist.
5573 @end table
5574
5575 @need 1500
5576 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5577 @section Exercises
5578
5579 @itemize @bullet
5580 @item
5581 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5582 then test it to see whether it works.
5583
5584 @item
5585 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5586 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5587
5588 @item
5589 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5590 function.
5591 @end itemize
5592
5593 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5594 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5595 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5596
5597 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5598 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5599 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5600 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5601 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5602 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5603 to which the name refers.
5604
5605 @menu
5606 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5607 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5608 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5609 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5610 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5611 * optional Exercise::
5612 @end menu
5613
5614 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5615 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5616 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5617 @findex copy-to-buffer
5618
5619 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5620 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5621 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5622 previous text in the second buffer.
5623
5624 @need 800
5625 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5626
5627 @smallexample
5628 @group
5629 @dots{}
5630 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5631 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5632 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5633 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5634 (erase-buffer)
5635 (save-excursion
5636 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5637 @end group
5638 @end smallexample
5639
5640 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5641 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5642
5643 @need 800
5644 The definition then says
5645
5646 @smallexample
5647 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5648 @end smallexample
5649
5650 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5651 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5652 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5653 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5654 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5655 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5656
5657 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5658 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5659 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5660 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5661 mechanism.)
5662
5663 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5664 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5665
5666 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5667 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5668
5669 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5670 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5671 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5672 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5673 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5674 @code{oldbuf}).
5675
5676 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5677 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5678
5679 @need 1250
5680 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5681
5682 @smallexample
5683 @group
5684 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5685 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5686 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5687 (erase-buffer)
5688 (save-excursion
5689 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5690 @end group
5691 @end smallexample
5692
5693 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5694 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5695 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5696 @findex insert-buffer
5697
5698 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5699 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5700 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5701 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5702
5703 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5704 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5705
5706 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5707 a discussion of the new body.)
5708
5709 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5710 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5711 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5712
5713 @menu
5714 * insert-buffer code::
5715 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5716 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5717 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5718 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5719 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5720 * New insert-buffer::
5721 @end menu
5722
5723 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5724 @ifnottex
5725 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5726 @end ifnottex
5727
5728 @need 800
5729 Here is the earlier code:
5730
5731 @smallexample
5732 @group
5733 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5734 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5735 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5736 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5737 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5738 @end group
5739 @group
5740 (or (bufferp buffer)
5741 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5742 (let (start end newmark)
5743 (save-excursion
5744 (save-excursion
5745 (set-buffer buffer)
5746 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5747 @end group
5748 @group
5749 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5750 (setq newmark (point)))
5751 (push-mark newmark)))
5752 @end group
5753 @end smallexample
5754
5755 @need 1200
5756 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5757 outline of the function:
5758
5759 @smallexample
5760 @group
5761 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5762 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5763 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5764 @var{body}@dots{})
5765 @end group
5766 @end smallexample
5767
5768 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5769 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5770 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5771 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5772
5773 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5774 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5775 buffer:@: }.
5776
5777 @menu
5778 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5779 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5780 @end menu
5781
5782 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5783 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5784 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5785 @cindex Read-only buffer
5786 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5787 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5788
5789 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5790 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5791 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5792 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5793 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5794 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5795 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5796
5797 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5798 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5799 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5800
5801 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5802 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5803 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5804 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5805 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5806 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5807 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5808 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5809 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5810 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5811 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5812
5813 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5814 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5815 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5816 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5817
5818 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5819 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5820 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5821
5822 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5823 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5824 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5825 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5826 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5827 into the current buffer.
5828
5829 @need 1250
5830 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5831 function like this:
5832
5833 @smallexample
5834 @group
5835 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5836 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5837 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5838 (or @dots{}
5839 @dots{}
5840 @end group
5841 @group
5842 (let (@var{varlist})
5843 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5844 @end group
5845 @end smallexample
5846
5847 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5848 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5849 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5850
5851 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5852 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5853
5854 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5855 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5856 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5857
5858 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5859 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5860 then the buffer itself must be got.
5861
5862 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5863 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5864 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5865 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5866
5867 @need 800
5868 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5869
5870 @smallexample
5871 @group
5872 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5873 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5874 @end group
5875 @end smallexample
5876
5877 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5878 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5879
5880 @need 1200
5881 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5882 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5883
5884 @smallexample
5885 @group
5886 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5887 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5888 @end group
5889 @end smallexample
5890
5891 @noindent
5892 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5893 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5894 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5895
5896 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5897 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5898 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5899 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5900 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5901 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5902 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5903 Argument}.)
5904
5905 @need 1200
5906 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5907 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5908
5909 @smallexample
5910 (not (bufferp buffer))
5911 @end smallexample
5912
5913 @noindent
5914 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5915 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5916 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5917 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5918
5919 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5920 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5921 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5922 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5923 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5924 a buffer.
5925
5926 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5927 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5928 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5929 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5930 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5931 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5932 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5933 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5934
5935 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5936 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5937 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5938
5939 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5940 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5941 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5942 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5943 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5944 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5945
5946 @findex or
5947 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5948 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5949 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5950 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5951 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5952
5953 @need 800
5954 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5955
5956 @smallexample
5957 @group
5958 (or (bufferp buffer)
5959 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5960 @end group
5961 @end smallexample
5962
5963 @noindent
5964 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5965 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5966 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5967 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5968 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5969 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5970 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5971
5972 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5973 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5974 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5975 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5976 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5977 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5978 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5979
5980 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5981 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5982 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5983 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5984 buffer.
5985
5986 @need 1250
5987 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5988 written like this:
5989
5990 @smallexample
5991 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5992 @end smallexample
5993
5994 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
5995 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5996 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5997
5998 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5999 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
6000 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
6001 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
6002 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
6003 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
6004 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
6005
6006 @need 1200
6007 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
6008 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
6009 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
6010
6011 @smallexample
6012 @group
6013 (save-excursion
6014 (set-buffer buffer)
6015 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6016 @end group
6017 @end smallexample
6018
6019 @noindent
6020 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
6021 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6022 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6023 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6024 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6025 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6026 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6027 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6028 fourth.
6029
6030 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6031 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6032 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6033 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6034
6035 @need 1250
6036 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6037
6038 @smallexample
6039 @group
6040 (save-excursion
6041 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6042 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6043 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6044 (setq newmark (point)))
6045 @end group
6046 @end smallexample
6047
6048 @noindent
6049 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6050 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6051 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6052 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6053 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6054 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6055 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6056
6057 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6058 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6059
6060 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6061 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6062 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6063 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6064 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6065 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6066 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6067 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6068 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6069 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6070
6071 @need 1250
6072 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6073
6074 @smallexample
6075 @group
6076 (let (start end newmark)
6077 (save-excursion
6078 (save-excursion
6079 (set-buffer buffer)
6080 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6081 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6082 (setq newmark (point)))
6083 (push-mark newmark))
6084 @end group
6085 @end smallexample
6086
6087 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6088 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6089 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6090 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6091 find and use again and again.
6092
6093 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6094 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6095 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6096 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6097 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6098
6099 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6100
6101 @need 1250
6102 It consists of two expressions,
6103
6104 @smallexample
6105 @group
6106 (push-mark
6107 (save-excursion
6108 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6109 (point)))
6110
6111 nil
6112 @end group
6113 @end smallexample
6114
6115 @noindent
6116 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6117 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6118
6119 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6120 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6121 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6122 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6123 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6124 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6125
6126 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6127 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6128 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6129 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6130 return any value.
6131
6132 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6134 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6135 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6136
6137 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6138 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6139 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6140 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6141
6142 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6143 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6144 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6145 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6146 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6147 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6148 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6149 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6150 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6151 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6152 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6153 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6154 moves to the end of the buffer.
6155
6156 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6157 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6158
6159 @menu
6160 * Optional Arguments::
6161 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6162 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6163 @end menu
6164
6165 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6166 @subsection Optional Arguments
6167
6168 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6169 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6170 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6171 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6172
6173 @cindex Optional arguments
6174 @cindex Keyword
6175 @findex optional
6176 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6177 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6178 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6179 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6180 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6181 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6182
6183 @need 1200
6184 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6185 therefore looks like this:
6186
6187 @smallexample
6188 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6189 @end smallexample
6190
6191 @need 1250
6192 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6193
6194 @smallexample
6195 @group
6196 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6197 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6198 (interactive "P")
6199 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6200 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6201 (push-mark))
6202 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6203 (goto-char
6204 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6205 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6206 @var{else-go-to}
6207 (point-min))))
6208 @var{do-nicety}
6209 @end group
6210 @end smallexample
6211
6212 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6213 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6214 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6215 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6216 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6217
6218 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6219 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6220 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6221 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6222 Manual}.)
6223
6224 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6225 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6226 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6227 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6228 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6229 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6230 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6231
6232 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6233 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6234 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6235 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6236 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6237 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6238 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6239 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6240 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6241 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6242 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6243 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6244 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6245 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6246 simplified form.
6247
6248 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6249 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6250
6251 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6252 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6253 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6254 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6255 like this:
6256
6257 @smallexample
6258 @group
6259 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6260 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6261 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6262 (/ size 10))
6263 (/
6264 (+ 10
6265 (*
6266 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6267 @end group
6268 @end smallexample
6269
6270 @menu
6271 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6272 * Large buffer case::
6273 * Small buffer case::
6274 @end menu
6275
6276 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6277 @ifnottex
6278 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6279 @end ifnottex
6280
6281 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6282 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6283 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6284 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6285
6286 @smallexample
6287 @group
6288 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6289 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6290 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6291 @end group
6292 @end smallexample
6293
6294 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6295 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6296 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6297 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6298 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6299 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6300 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6301 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6302 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6303
6304 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6305
6306 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6307 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6308 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6309
6310 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6311 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6312 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6313 that comes from the let expression.
6314
6315 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6316 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6317 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6318 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6319 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6320 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6321
6322 @need 800
6323 The line looks like this:
6324
6325 @smallexample
6326 (if (> size 10000)
6327 @end smallexample
6328
6329 @need 1200
6330 @noindent
6331 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6332 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6333
6334 @smallexample
6335 @group
6336 (*
6337 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6338 (/ size 10))
6339 @end group
6340 @end smallexample
6341
6342 @noindent
6343 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6344 @code{*}.
6345
6346 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6347 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6348 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6349 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6350 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6351 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6352
6353 @findex / @r{(division)}
6354 @cindex Division
6355 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6356 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6357 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6358 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6359 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6360 multiplication.)
6361
6362 @need 1200
6363 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6364 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6365
6366 @smallexample
6367 @group
6368 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6369 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6370 @end group
6371 @end smallexample
6372
6373 @noindent
6374 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6375 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6376
6377 @need 1200
6378 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6379 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6380
6381 @smallexample
6382 @group
6383 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6384 (/ size 10)))
6385 @end group
6386 @end smallexample
6387
6388 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6389
6390 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6392 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6393
6394 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6395 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6396 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6397 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6398 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6399
6400 @need 800
6401 The code looks like this:
6402
6403 @c Keep this on one line.
6404 @smallexample
6405 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6406 @end smallexample
6407
6408 @need 1200
6409 @noindent
6410 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6411 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6412 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6413 enclosing expression:
6414
6415 @smallexample
6416 @group
6417 (/
6418 (+ 10
6419 (*
6420 size
6421 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6422 10))
6423 @end group
6424 @end smallexample
6425
6426 @need 1200
6427 @noindent
6428 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6429 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6430 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6431 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6432
6433 @smallexample
6434 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6435 @end smallexample
6436
6437 @noindent
6438 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6439 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6440 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6441 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6442 position in the buffer.
6443
6444 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6445 the cursor is moved to that point.
6446
6447 @need 1500
6448 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6449 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6450 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6451
6452 @need 1000
6453 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6454 @sp 1
6455
6456 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6457 @smallexample
6458 @group
6459 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6460 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6461 leave mark at previous position.
6462 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6463 do not set mark at previous position.
6464 With numeric arg N,
6465 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6466
6467 If the buffer is narrowed,
6468 this command uses the beginning and size
6469 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6470 @end group
6471
6472 @group
6473 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6474 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6475 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6476 (interactive "P")
6477 (or (consp arg)
6478 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6479 (push-mark))
6480 @end group
6481 @group
6482 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6483 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6484 (+ (point-min)
6485 (if (> size 10000)
6486 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6487 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6488 (/ size 10))
6489 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6490 10)))
6491 (point-min))))
6492 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6493 @end group
6494 @end smallexample
6495
6496 @ignore
6497 From before GNU Emacs 22
6498 @smallexample
6499 @group
6500 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6501 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6502 leave mark at previous position.
6503 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6504 from the true beginning.
6505 @end group
6506 @group
6507 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6508 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6509 and does not set the mark."
6510 (interactive "P")
6511 (push-mark)
6512 @end group
6513 @group
6514 (goto-char
6515 (if arg
6516 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6517 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6518 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6519 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6520 @end group
6521 @group
6522 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6523 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6524 10))
6525 (point-min)))
6526 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6527 @end group
6528 @end smallexample
6529 @end ignore
6530
6531 @noindent
6532 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6533 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6534 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6535 the function.
6536
6537 @need 800
6538 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6539
6540 @smallexample
6541 \\[universal-argument]
6542 @end smallexample
6543
6544 @noindent
6545 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6546 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6547 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6548 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6549 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6550 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6551 information.)
6552
6553 @need 1200
6554 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6555 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6556 invoked with an argument:
6557
6558 @smallexample
6559 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6560 @end smallexample
6561
6562 @noindent
6563 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6564 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6565 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6566 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6567 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6568 to draw complaints.
6569
6570 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6571 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6572 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6573 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6574 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6575 happening.
6576
6577 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6578 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6579 @section Review
6580
6581 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6582
6583 @table @code
6584 @item or
6585 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6586 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6587 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6588 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6589 others are true.
6590
6591 @item and
6592 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6593 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6594 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6595 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6596 true.
6597
6598 @item &optional
6599 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6600 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6601 argument, if desired.
6602
6603 @item prefix-numeric-value
6604 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6605 "P")} to a numeric value.
6606
6607 @item forward-line
6608 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6609 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6610 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6611 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6612 supposed to move but couldn't.
6613
6614 @item erase-buffer
6615 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6616
6617 @item bufferp
6618 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6619 @end table
6620
6621 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6622 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6623
6624 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6625 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6626 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6627 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6628 56 as a default value.
6629
6630 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6631 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6632 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6633 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6634 @cindex Narrowing
6635 @cindex Widening
6636
6637 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6638 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6639 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6640 novices.
6641
6642 @menu
6643 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6644 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6645 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6646 * narrow Exercise::
6647 @end menu
6648
6649 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6650 @ifnottex
6651 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6652 @end ifnottex
6653
6654 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6655 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6656 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6657 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6658 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6659 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6660 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6661 narrowing just to the region you want.
6662 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6663
6664 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6665 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6666 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6667 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6668 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6669 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6670 @code{widen} command.
6671 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6672
6673 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6674 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6675 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6676 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6677 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6678 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6679 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6680 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6681 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6682 situation.
6683
6684 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6685 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6686 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6687 @findex save-restriction
6688
6689 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6690 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6691 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6692 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6693 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6694 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6695 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6696 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6697 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6698 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6699 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6700 function.
6701
6702 @need 1250
6703 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6704
6705 @smallexample
6706 @group
6707 (save-restriction
6708 @var{body}@dots{} )
6709 @end group
6710 @end smallexample
6711
6712 @noindent
6713 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6714 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6715
6716 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6717 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6718 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6719 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6720 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6721 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6722 like this:
6723
6724 @smallexample
6725 @group
6726 (save-excursion
6727 (save-restriction
6728 @var{body}@dots{}))
6729 @end group
6730 @end smallexample
6731
6732 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6733 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6734 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6735
6736 @need 1250
6737 For example,
6738
6739 @smallexample
6740 @group
6741 (save-restriction
6742 (widen)
6743 (save-excursion
6744 @var{body}@dots{}))
6745 @end group
6746 @end smallexample
6747
6748 @ignore
6749 Emacs 22
6750 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6751
6752 (defun what-line ()
6753 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6754 (interactive)
6755 (let ((start (point-min))
6756 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6757 (if (= start 1)
6758 (message "Line %d" n)
6759 (save-excursion
6760 (save-restriction
6761 (widen)
6762 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6763 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6764
6765 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6766 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6767 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6768 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6769 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6770 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6771 (save-excursion
6772 (goto-char (point-min))
6773 (setq start (point))
6774 (goto-char opoint)
6775 (forward-line 0)
6776 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6777
6778 (defun count-lines (start end)
6779 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6780 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6781 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6782 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6783 (save-excursion
6784 (save-restriction
6785 (narrow-to-region start end)
6786 (goto-char (point-min))
6787 (if (eq selective-display t)
6788 (save-match-data
6789 (let ((done 0))
6790 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6791 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6792 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6793 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6794 (goto-char (point-max))
6795 (if (and (/= start end)
6796 (not (bolp)))
6797 (1+ done)
6798 done)))
6799 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6800 @end ignore
6801
6802 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6803 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6804 @section @code{what-line}
6805 @findex what-line
6806 @cindex Widening, example of
6807
6808 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6809 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6810 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6811 original text of the function:
6812
6813 @smallexample
6814 @group
6815 (defun what-line ()
6816 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6817 (interactive)
6818 (save-restriction
6819 (widen)
6820 (save-excursion
6821 (beginning-of-line)
6822 (message "Line %d"
6823 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6824 @end group
6825 @end smallexample
6826
6827 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6828 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6829 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6830 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6831 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6832 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6833 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6834 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6835
6836 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6837 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6838 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6839 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6840
6841 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6842 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6843 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6844
6845 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6846 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6847 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6848
6849 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6850 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6851 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6852 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6853 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6854 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6855 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6856 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6857 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6858
6859 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6860 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6861 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6862 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6863
6864 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6865 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6866 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6867 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6868
6869 @need 1200
6870 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6871 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6872 echo area.
6873
6874 @smallexample
6875 @group
6876 (message "Line %d"
6877 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6878 @end group
6879 @end smallexample
6880
6881 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6882 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6883 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6884 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6885 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6886 @samp{Line 243}.
6887
6888 @need 1200
6889 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6890 last line of the function:
6891
6892 @smallexample
6893 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6894 @end smallexample
6895
6896 @ignore
6897 GNU Emacs 22
6898
6899 (defun count-lines (start end)
6900 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6901 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6902 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6903 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6904 (save-excursion
6905 (save-restriction
6906 (narrow-to-region start end)
6907 (goto-char (point-min))
6908 (if (eq selective-display t)
6909 (save-match-data
6910 (let ((done 0))
6911 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6912 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6913 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6914 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6915 (goto-char (point-max))
6916 (if (and (/= start end)
6917 (not (bolp)))
6918 (1+ done)
6919 done)))
6920 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6921 @end ignore
6922
6923 @noindent
6924 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6925 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6926 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6927 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6928 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6929 current line.
6930
6931 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6932 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6933 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6934 the original narrowing, if any.
6935
6936 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6937 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6938
6939 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6940 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6941 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6942 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6943 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6944 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6945 @code{buffer-substring}.
6946
6947 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6948 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6949 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6950 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6951 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6952 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6953 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6954 Manual}.)
6955
6956 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6957 Or can you write the function without them?
6958
6959 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6960 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6961 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6962 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6963 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6964
6965 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6966 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6967 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6968
6969 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6970 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6971 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6972
6973 @menu
6974 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6975 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6976 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6977 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6978 * nth::
6979 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6980 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6981 * cons Exercise::
6982 @end menu
6983
6984 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6985 @ifnottex
6986 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6987 @end ifnottex
6988
6989 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6990 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6991 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6992 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6993 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6994 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6995 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6996 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6997 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6998 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6999 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
7000 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
7001 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
7002 introduction.
7003
7004 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
7005 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7006 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7007
7008 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
7009 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
7010 @code{rose}.
7011
7012 @need 1200
7013 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7014 evaluating the following:
7015
7016 @smallexample
7017 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7018 @end smallexample
7019
7020 @noindent
7021 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7022 area.
7023
7024 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7025 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7026
7027 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7028 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7029 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7030 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7031
7032 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7033 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7034 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7035 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7036 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7037 buttercup)}.
7038
7039 @need 800
7040 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7041
7042 @smallexample
7043 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7044 @end smallexample
7045
7046 @noindent
7047 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7048 the echo area.
7049
7050 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7051 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7052 elements are.
7053
7054 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7055 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7056 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7057
7058 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7059
7060 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7061 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7062 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7063 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7064 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7065 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7066 after you will be grateful to you.)
7067
7068 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7069 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7070 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7071 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7072 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7073 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7074 the usual way:
7075
7076 @smallexample
7077 @group
7078 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7079
7080 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7081 @end group
7082 @end smallexample
7083
7084 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7085 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7086 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7087 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7088
7089 @smallexample
7090 @group
7091 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7092 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7093 (whale dolphin seal)))
7094 @end group
7095 @end smallexample
7096
7097 @noindent
7098 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7099 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7100 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7101
7102 @smallexample
7103 @group
7104 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7105 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7106 (whale dolphin seal)))
7107 @end group
7108 @end smallexample
7109
7110 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7111 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7112 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7113
7114 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7115 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7116 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7117 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7118 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7119 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7120 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7121 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7122 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7123 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7124 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7125 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7126
7127 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7128 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7129 @section @code{cons}
7130 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7131
7132 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7133 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7134 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7135
7136 @smallexample
7137 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7138 @end smallexample
7139
7140 @need 800
7141 @noindent
7142 After evaluating this list, you will see
7143
7144 @smallexample
7145 (pine fir oak maple)
7146 @end smallexample
7147
7148 @noindent
7149 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7150 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7151 list.
7152
7153 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7154 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7155 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7156 existing list, but creates a new one.
7157
7158 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7159
7160 @menu
7161 * Build a list::
7162 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7163 @end menu
7164
7165 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7166 @ifnottex
7167 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7168 @end ifnottex
7169
7170 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7171 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7172 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7173 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7174 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7175 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7176 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7177 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7178 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7179 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7180
7181 @smallexample
7182 @group
7183 (cons 'buttercup ())
7184 @result{} (buttercup)
7185 @end group
7186
7187 @group
7188 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7189 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7190 @end group
7191
7192 @group
7193 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7194 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7195 @end group
7196
7197 @group
7198 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7199 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7200 @end group
7201 @end smallexample
7202
7203 @noindent
7204 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7205 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7206 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7207 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7208 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7209 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7210
7211 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7212 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7213 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7214 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7215
7216 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7217 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7218 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7219 @findex length
7220
7221 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7222 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7223
7224 @smallexample
7225 @group
7226 (length '(buttercup))
7227 @result{} 1
7228 @end group
7229
7230 @group
7231 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7232 @result{} 2
7233 @end group
7234
7235 @group
7236 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7237 @result{} 3
7238 @end group
7239 @end smallexample
7240
7241 @noindent
7242 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7243 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7244 its argument.
7245
7246 @need 1200
7247 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7248 empty list:
7249
7250 @smallexample
7251 @group
7252 (length ())
7253 @result{} 0
7254 @end group
7255 @end smallexample
7256
7257 @noindent
7258 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7259
7260 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7261 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7262 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7263
7264 @smallexample
7265 (length )
7266 @end smallexample
7267
7268 @need 800
7269 @noindent
7270 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7271
7272 @smallexample
7273 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7274 @end smallexample
7275
7276 @noindent
7277 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7278 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7279 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7280 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7281 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7282
7283 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7284 the function.
7285
7286 @ignore
7287 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7288
7289 In an earlier version:
7290 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7291 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7292 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7293 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7294 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7295 about subroutines.
7296 @end ignore
7297
7298 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7299 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7300 @section @code{nthcdr}
7301 @findex nthcdr
7302
7303 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7304 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7305
7306 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7307 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7308 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7309 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7310 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7311 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7312 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7313 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7314 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7315
7316 @need 1200
7317 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7318 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7319
7320 @smallexample
7321 @group
7322 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7323 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7324 @end group
7325
7326 @group
7327 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7328 @result{} (oak maple)
7329 @end group
7330
7331 @group
7332 (cdr '(oak maple))
7333 @result{}(maple)
7334 @end group
7335
7336 @group
7337 (cdr '(maple))
7338 @result{} nil
7339 @end group
7340
7341 @group
7342 (cdr 'nil)
7343 @result{} nil
7344 @end group
7345
7346 @group
7347 (cdr ())
7348 @result{} nil
7349 @end group
7350 @end smallexample
7351
7352 @need 1200
7353 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7354 between, like this:
7355
7356 @smallexample
7357 @group
7358 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7359 @result{} (oak maple)
7360 @end group
7361 @end smallexample
7362
7363 @noindent
7364 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7365 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7366 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7367 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7368 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7369 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7370 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7371 first two elements.
7372
7373 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7374 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7375 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7376 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7377 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7378
7379 @smallexample
7380 @group
7381 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7382 @result{} (oak maple)
7383 @end group
7384 @end smallexample
7385
7386 @need 1200
7387 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7388 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7389 and 5:
7390
7391 @smallexample
7392 @group
7393 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7394 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7395 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7396 @end group
7397
7398 @group
7399 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7400 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7401 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7402 @end group
7403
7404 @group
7405 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7406 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7407 @result{} (maple)
7408 @end group
7409
7410 @group
7411 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7412 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7413 @result{} nil
7414 @end group
7415
7416 @group
7417 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7418 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7419 @result{} nil
7420 @end group
7421 @end smallexample
7422
7423 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7424 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7425 @section @code{nth}
7426 @findex nth
7427
7428 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7429 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7430 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7431
7432 @need 1500
7433 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7434 @code{nth} would be:
7435
7436 @smallexample
7437 @group
7438 (defun nth (n list)
7439 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7440 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7441 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7442 @end group
7443 @end smallexample
7444
7445 @noindent
7446 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7447 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7448
7449 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7450 This can be very convenient.
7451
7452 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7453 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7454 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7455 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7456 is `one-based'.
7457
7458 @need 1250
7459 For example:
7460
7461 @smallexample
7462 @group
7463 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7464 @result{} "one"
7465
7466 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7467 @result{} "two"
7468 @end group
7469 @end smallexample
7470
7471 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7472 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7473 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7474 @code{setcdr} functions.
7475
7476 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7477 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7478 @section @code{setcar}
7479 @findex setcar
7480
7481 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7482 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7483 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7484 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7485 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7486
7487 @need 1200
7488 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7489 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7490
7491 @smallexample
7492 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7493 @end smallexample
7494
7495 @noindent
7496 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7497 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7498 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7499 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7500 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7501 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7502 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7503 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7504 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7505 parenthesis.)
7506
7507 @need 1200
7508 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7509 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7510
7511 @smallexample
7512 @group
7513 animals
7514 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7515 @end group
7516 @end smallexample
7517
7518 @noindent
7519 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7520 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7521
7522 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7523 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7524 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7525 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7526 usual fashion:
7527
7528 @smallexample
7529 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7530 @end smallexample
7531
7532 @need 1200
7533 @noindent
7534 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7535 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7536
7537 @smallexample
7538 @group
7539 animals
7540 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7541 @end group
7542 @end smallexample
7543
7544 @noindent
7545 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7546 @code{hippopotamus}.
7547
7548 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7549 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7550 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7551
7552 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7553 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7554 @section @code{setcdr}
7555 @findex setcdr
7556
7557 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7558 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7559 a list rather than the first element.
7560
7561 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7562 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7563 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7564
7565 @need 1200
7566 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7567 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7568
7569 @smallexample
7570 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7571 @end smallexample
7572
7573 @need 1200
7574 @noindent
7575 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7576 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7577
7578 @smallexample
7579 @group
7580 domesticated-animals
7581 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7582 @end group
7583 @end smallexample
7584
7585 @need 1200
7586 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7587 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7588 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7589
7590 @smallexample
7591 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7592 @end smallexample
7593
7594 @noindent
7595 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7596 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7597 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7598 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7599
7600 @smallexample
7601 @group
7602 domesticated-animals
7603 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7604 @end group
7605 @end smallexample
7606
7607 @noindent
7608 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7609 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7610 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7611
7612 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7613 @section Exercise
7614
7615 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7616 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7617 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7618 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7619
7620 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7622 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7623 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7624 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7625 @cindex Killing text
7626 @cindex Clipping text
7627 @cindex Erasing text
7628 @cindex Deleting text
7629
7630 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7631 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7632 `yank' command.
7633
7634 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7635 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7636 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7637 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7638 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7639 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7640 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7641
7642 @menu
7643 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7644 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7645 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7646 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7647 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7648 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7649 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7650 * search Exercises::
7651 @end menu
7652
7653 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7654 @ifnottex
7655 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7656 @end ifnottex
7657
7658 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7659 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7660 look like this:
7661
7662 @smallexample
7663 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7664 @end smallexample
7665
7666 @need 1200
7667 @noindent
7668 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7669 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7670 this:
7671
7672 @smallexample
7673 @group
7674 (cons "another piece"
7675 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7676 @end group
7677 @end smallexample
7678
7679 @need 1200
7680 @noindent
7681 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7682 the echo area:
7683
7684 @smallexample
7685 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7686 @end smallexample
7687
7688 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7689 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7690 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7691 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7692 second element of the original list:
7693
7694 @smallexample
7695 @group
7696 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7697 "a piece of text"
7698 "previous piece")))
7699 @result{} "a piece of text"
7700 @end group
7701 @end smallexample
7702
7703 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7704 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7705 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7706 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7707 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7708 than nothing at all.
7709
7710 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7711 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7712 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7713 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7714 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7715 climb the foothills.
7716
7717 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7718 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7719
7720 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7721 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7722 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7723 @findex zap-to-char
7724
7725 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7726 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7727 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7728 rewrite.
7729
7730 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7731 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7732
7733 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7734 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7735 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7736
7737 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7738
7739 @menu
7740 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7741 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7742 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7743 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7744 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7745 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7746 @end menu
7747
7748 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7749 @ifnottex
7750 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7751 @end ifnottex
7752
7753 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7754 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7755 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7756 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7757 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7758 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7759 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7760 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7761 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7762 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7763
7764 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7765 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7766 any text.
7767
7768 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7769 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7770 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7771 deletion command.
7772
7773 @ignore
7774 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7775 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7776 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7777 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7778 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7779 (kill-region (point)
7780 (progn
7781 (search-forward
7782 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7783 (point))))
7784 @end ignore
7785
7786 @need 1250
7787 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7788
7789 @c GNU Emacs 22
7790 @smallexample
7791 @group
7792 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7793 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7794 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7795 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7796 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7797 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7798 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7799 (kill-region (point) (progn
7800 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7801 nil nil arg)
7802 (point))))
7803 @end group
7804 @end smallexample
7805
7806 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7807 of the word `kill'.
7808
7809 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7810 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7811 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7812
7813 @need 800
7814 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7815 this:
7816
7817 @smallexample
7818 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7819 @end smallexample
7820
7821 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7822 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7823 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7824 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7825 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7826 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7827 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7828 this argument.
7829
7830 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7831 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7832 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7833 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7834 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7835 make it look good).
7836
7837 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7838 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7839
7840 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7841 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7842 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7843 beep or blink at you.
7844
7845 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7846 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7847 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7848
7849 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7850 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7851 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7852
7853 The first part of the code looks like this:
7854
7855 @smallexample
7856 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7857 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7858 (kill-region (point) (progn
7859 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7860 (point)))
7861 @end smallexample
7862
7863 @noindent
7864 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7865 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7866 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7867 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7868 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7869 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7870 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7871 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7872
7873 @noindent
7874 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7875
7876 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7877 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7878 @code{point}.
7879
7880 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7881 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7882 then at @code{progn}.
7883
7884 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7885 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7886 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7887 @findex search-forward
7888
7889 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7890 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7891 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7892 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7893 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7894 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7895 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7896 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7897 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7898 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7899
7900 @need 1250
7901 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7902
7903 @smallexample
7904 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7905 @end smallexample
7906
7907 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7908
7909 @enumerate
7910 @item
7911 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7912 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7913
7914 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7915 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7916 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7917 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7918 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7919 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7920 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7921 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7922 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7923 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7924 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7925 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7926
7927 @item
7928 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7929 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7930 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7931
7932 @item
7933 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7934 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7935 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7936 signal an error when the search fails.
7937
7938 @item
7939 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7940 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7941 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7942 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7943 backwards.
7944 @end enumerate
7945
7946 @need 800
7947 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7948
7949 @smallexample
7950 @group
7951 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7952 @var{limit-of-search}
7953 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7954 @var{repeat-count})
7955 @end group
7956 @end smallexample
7957
7958 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7959
7960 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7961 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7962 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7963 @findex progn
7964
7965 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7966 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7967 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7968 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7969
7970 @need 800
7971 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7972
7973 @smallexample
7974 @group
7975 (progn
7976 @var{body}@dots{})
7977 @end group
7978 @end smallexample
7979
7980 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7981 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7982 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7983
7984 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7985 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7986 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7987 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7988 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7989 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7990
7991 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7992 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7993 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7994 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7995 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7996 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7997 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7998 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7999 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
8000
8001 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
8002 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8003 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
8004
8005 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
8006 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
8007
8008 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
8009 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
8010 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8011 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8012 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8013 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8014 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8015
8016 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8017 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8018 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8019 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8020 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8021 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8022
8023 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8024 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8025 @section @code{kill-region}
8026 @findex kill-region
8027
8028 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8029 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8030 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8031
8032 @ignore
8033 GNU Emacs 22:
8034
8035 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8036 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8037 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8038 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8039 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8040
8041 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8042 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8043
8044 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8045 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8046 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8047
8048 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8049 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8050 to be killed.
8051 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8052 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8053 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8054 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8055
8056 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8057 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8058 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8059 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8060 ;; when calling kill-append.
8061 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8062 (unless (and beg end)
8063 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8064 (condition-case nil
8065 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8066 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8067 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8068 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8069 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8070 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8071 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8072 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8073 nil)
8074 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8075 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8076 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8077 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8078 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8079 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8080 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8081 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8082 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8083 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8084 (if kill-read-only-ok
8085 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8086 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8087 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8088 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8089 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8090 @end ignore
8091
8092 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8093 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8094 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8095
8096 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8097 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8098 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8099 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8100 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8101
8102 @menu
8103 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8104 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8105 * Lisp macro::
8106 @end menu
8107
8108 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8109 @ifnottex
8110 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8111 @end ifnottex
8112
8113 @need 1200
8114 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8115 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8116 added:
8117
8118 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8119 @smallexample
8120 @group
8121 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8122 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8123 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8124 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8125 @end group
8126
8127 @group
8128 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8129 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8130 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8131 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8132 (unless (and beg end)
8133 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8134 @end group
8135
8136 @group
8137 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8138 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8139 ;; information about the error signal is not
8140 ;; stored for use by another function.
8141 (condition-case nil
8142 @end group
8143
8144 @group
8145 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8146 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8147 @end group
8148
8149 @group
8150 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8151 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8152 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8153 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8154 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8155 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8156 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8157 @end group
8158
8159 @group
8160 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8161 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8162 ;; item in the kill ring.
8163 @end group
8164
8165 @group
8166 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8167 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8168 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8169 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8170 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8171 ;; be `kill-region'.
8172 @end group
8173 @group
8174 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8175 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8176 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8177 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8178 @end group
8179 @group
8180 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8181 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8182 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8183 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8184 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8185 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8186 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8187 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8188 nil)
8189 @end group
8190
8191 @group
8192 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8193 ;; what to do with an error.
8194 @end group
8195 @group
8196 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8197 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8198 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8199 ;; then the body is executed.
8200 @end group
8201 @group
8202 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8203 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8204 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8205 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8206 @end group
8207 @group
8208 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8209 ;; it will be set in an error
8210 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8211 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8212 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8213 ;; don't if you may not.
8214 @end group
8215 @group
8216 (if kill-read-only-ok
8217 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8218 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8219 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8220 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8221 @end group
8222 @end smallexample
8223
8224 @ignore
8225 @c v 21
8226 @smallexample
8227 @group
8228 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8229 "Kill between point and mark.
8230 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8231 (interactive "r")
8232 @end group
8233
8234 @group
8235 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8236 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8237 ;; information about the error signal is not
8238 ;; stored for use by another function.
8239 (condition-case nil
8240 @end group
8241
8242 @group
8243 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8244 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8245 @end group
8246
8247 @group
8248 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8249 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8250 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8251 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8252 @end group
8253
8254 @group
8255 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8256 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8257 ;; previous command.
8258 @end group
8259 @group
8260 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8261 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8262 (when string
8263 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8264 ;; if true, prepend string
8265 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8266 (kill-new string)))
8267 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8268 @end group
8269
8270 @group
8271 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8272 ;; what to do with an error.
8273 @end group
8274 @group
8275 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8276 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8277 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8278 ;; then the body is executed.
8279 @end group
8280 @group
8281 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8282 ;; then...
8283 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8284 @end group
8285 @group
8286 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8287 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8288 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8289 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8290 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8291 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8292 @end group
8293 @end smallexample
8294 @end ignore
8295
8296 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8297 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8298 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8299 @findex condition-case
8300
8301 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8302 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8303 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8304 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8305 shows you a message.
8306
8307 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8308 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8309 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8310 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8311 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8312 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8313 special form.
8314
8315 @need 800
8316 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8317
8318 @smallexample
8319 @group
8320 (condition-case
8321 @var{var}
8322 @var{bodyform}
8323 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8324 @end group
8325 @end smallexample
8326
8327 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8328 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8329 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8330 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8331
8332 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8333 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8334 correctly.
8335
8336 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8337 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8338 names.
8339
8340 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8341 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8342 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8343 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8344 part of the error handler is run.
8345
8346 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8347 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8348
8349 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8350 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8351 handler is run.
8352
8353 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8354 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8355 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8356 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8357 discarded.
8358
8359 @need 1200
8360 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8361 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8362
8363 @smallexample
8364 @group
8365 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8366 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8367 @end group
8368 @end smallexample
8369
8370 @ignore
8371 2006 Oct 24
8372 In Emacs 22,
8373 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8374 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8375 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8376 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8377
8378 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8379 this is line 8054
8380 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8381 @end ignore
8382
8383 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8384 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8385 @subsection Lisp macro
8386 @cindex Macro, lisp
8387 @cindex Lisp macro
8388
8389 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8390 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8391 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8392 text that exists.
8393
8394 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8395 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8396 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8397 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8398
8399 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8400 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8401 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8402 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8403 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8404
8405 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8406 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8407 an @code{if} without a then clause
8408
8409 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8410 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8411 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8412
8413 @ignore
8414 We will briefly look at C macros in
8415 @ref{Digression into C}.
8416 @end ignore
8417
8418 @need 1200
8419 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8420 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8421 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8422 and an else-part.
8423
8424 @smallexample
8425 @group
8426 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8427 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8428 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8429 @end group
8430 @end smallexample
8431
8432 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8433 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8434
8435 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8436 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8437 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8438
8439 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8440 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8441 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8442
8443 @need 1200
8444 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8445 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8446
8447 @smallexample
8448 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8449 @end smallexample
8450
8451 @noindent
8452 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8453 clipped text in the kill ring.
8454
8455 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8456 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8457 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8458 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8459 @findex nthcdr
8460
8461 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8462 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8463 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8464
8465 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8466 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8467 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8468 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8469 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8470 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8471
8472 @menu
8473 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8474 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8475 @end menu
8476
8477 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8478 @ifnottex
8479 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8480 @end ifnottex
8481
8482 @need 1200
8483 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8484 function:
8485
8486 @smallexample
8487 @group
8488 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8489 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8490 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8491 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8492 system cut and paste."
8493 (interactive "r")
8494 @end group
8495 @group
8496 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8497 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8498 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8499 @end group
8500 @group
8501 (if transient-mark-mode
8502 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8503 nil)
8504 @end group
8505 @end smallexample
8506
8507 @need 800
8508 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8509
8510 @smallexample
8511 @group
8512 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8513 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8514 (interactive "r")
8515 @var{body}@dots{})
8516 @end group
8517 @end smallexample
8518
8519 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8520 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8521 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8522 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8523 almost becoming routine.
8524
8525 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8526 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8527 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8528 side-effects.
8529
8530 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8531 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8532 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8533 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8534 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8535 highlighted.)
8536
8537 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8538 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8539 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8540 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8541 ring.
8542
8543 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8544 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8545 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8546 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8547 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8548 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8549 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8550
8551 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8552 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8553
8554 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8555
8556 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8557 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8558 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8559
8560 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8561 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8562 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8563 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8564 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8565 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8566 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8567 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8568 order.
8569
8570 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8571 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8572 previous Emacs command.
8573
8574 @menu
8575 * last-command & this-command::
8576 * kill-append function::
8577 * kill-new function::
8578 @end menu
8579
8580 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8581 @ifnottex
8582 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8583 @end ifnottex
8584
8585 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8586 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8587 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8588 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8589 @code{this-command}.
8590
8591 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8592 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8593 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8594 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8595 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8596 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8597 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8598 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8599 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8600 function.
8601
8602 @need 1250
8603 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8604
8605 @smallexample
8606 @group
8607 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8608 ;; @r{then-part}
8609 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8610 ;; @r{else-part}
8611 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8612 @end group
8613 @end smallexample
8614
8615 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8616 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8617 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8618 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8619 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8620 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8621 properties were implemented.)
8622
8623 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8624 @noindent
8625 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8626 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8627 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8628 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8629 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8630 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8631 expressions are the same.
8632
8633 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8634 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8635
8636 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8637 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8638 @findex kill-append
8639
8640 @need 800
8641 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8642
8643 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8644 @smallexample
8645 @group
8646 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8647 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8648 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8649 @dots{} "
8650 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8651 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8652 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8653 (equal yank-handler
8654 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8655 yank-handler)))
8656 @end group
8657 @end smallexample
8658
8659 @ignore
8660 was:
8661 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8662 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8663 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8664 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8665 it."
8666 (kill-new (if before-p
8667 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8668 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8669 t))
8670 @end ignore
8671
8672 @noindent
8673 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8674 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8675 a moment.
8676
8677 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8678 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8679 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8680 `italics'.)
8681
8682 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8683 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8684 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8685 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8686 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8687
8688 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8689 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8690 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8691 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8692
8693 @smallexample
8694 @group
8695 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8696 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8697 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8698 @end group
8699 @end smallexample
8700
8701 @noindent
8702 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8703 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8704 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8705 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8706 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8707 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8708 previously saved text.
8709
8710 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8711 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8712 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8713 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8714 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8715 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8716 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8717 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8718 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8719 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8720 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8721 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8722 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8723 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8724
8725 @need 800
8726 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8727 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8728
8729 @smallexample
8730 (concat string cur)
8731 @end smallexample
8732
8733 @need 1200
8734 @noindent
8735 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8736 after the old text:
8737
8738 @smallexample
8739 (concat cur string))
8740 @end smallexample
8741
8742 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8743 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8744 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8745
8746 @smallexample
8747 @group
8748 (concat "abc" "def")
8749 @result{} "abcdef"
8750 @end group
8751
8752 @group
8753 (concat "new "
8754 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8755 @result{} "new first element"
8756
8757 (concat (car
8758 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8759 @result{} "first element modified"
8760 @end group
8761 @end smallexample
8762
8763 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8764 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8765 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8766 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8767
8768 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8769 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8770 @findex kill-new
8771
8772 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8773 @ignore
8774 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8775 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8776 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8777 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8778
8779 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8780 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8781 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8782 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8783 @end ignore
8784 @need 1200
8785 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8786
8787 @smallexample
8788 @group
8789 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8790 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8791 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8792
8793 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8794 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8795 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8796 @dots{}"
8797 @end group
8798 @group
8799 (if (> (length string) 0)
8800 (if yank-handler
8801 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8802 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8803 (if yank-handler
8804 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8805 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8806 @end group
8807 @group
8808 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8809 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8810 @end group
8811 @group
8812 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8813 (setcar kill-ring string)
8814 (push string kill-ring)
8815 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8816 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8817 @end group
8818 @group
8819 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8820 (if interprogram-cut-function
8821 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8822 @end group
8823 @end smallexample
8824 @ignore
8825 was:
8826 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8827 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8828 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8829 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8830 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8831 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8832 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8833 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8834 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8835 (setcar kill-ring string)
8836 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8837 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8838 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8839 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8840 (if interprogram-cut-function
8841 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8842 @end ignore
8843
8844 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8845
8846 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8847
8848 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8849 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8850 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8851
8852 @need 1200
8853 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8854
8855 @smallexample
8856 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8857 @end smallexample
8858
8859 @noindent
8860 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8861
8862 @noindent
8863 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8864 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8865 them below.
8866
8867 @need 1200
8868 The critical lines are these:
8869
8870 @smallexample
8871 @group
8872 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8873 ;; @r{then}
8874 (setcar kill-ring string)
8875 @end group
8876 @group
8877 ;; @r{else}
8878 (push string kill-ring)
8879 @end group
8880 @group
8881 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8882 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8883 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8884 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8885 @end group
8886 @group
8887 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8888 (if interprogram-cut-function
8889 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8890 @end group
8891 @end smallexample
8892
8893 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8894 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8895 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8896
8897 @need 1250
8898 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8899 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8900 expression is executed:
8901
8902 @smallexample
8903 (setcar kill-ring string)
8904 @end smallexample
8905
8906 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8907 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8908 first element.
8909
8910 @need 1250
8911 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8912 else-part of the condition is executed:
8913
8914 @smallexample
8915 (push string kill-ring)
8916 @end smallexample
8917
8918 @noindent
8919 @need 1250
8920 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8921 the older
8922
8923 @smallexample
8924 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8925 @end smallexample
8926
8927 @noindent
8928 @need 1250
8929 or the newer
8930
8931 @smallexample
8932 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8933 @end smallexample
8934
8935 @noindent
8936 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8937 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8938 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8939 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8940 ring from growing too long.
8941
8942 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8943
8944 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8945 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8946 kill ring.
8947
8948 We can see how this works with an example.
8949
8950 @need 800
8951 First,
8952
8953 @smallexample
8954 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8955 @end smallexample
8956
8957 @need 1200
8958 @noindent
8959 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8960 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8961
8962 @smallexample
8963 @group
8964 example-list
8965 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8966 @end group
8967 @end smallexample
8968
8969 @need 1200
8970 @noindent
8971 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8972 following expression:
8973 @findex push, @r{example}
8974
8975 @smallexample
8976 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8977 @end smallexample
8978
8979 @need 800
8980 @noindent
8981 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8982
8983 @smallexample
8984 @group
8985 example-list
8986 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8987 @end group
8988 @end smallexample
8989
8990 @noindent
8991 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8992
8993 @need 1200
8994 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8995 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8996
8997 @smallexample
8998 @group
8999 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
9000 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
9001 @end group
9002 @end smallexample
9003
9004 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
9005 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
9006 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
9007 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
9008 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
9009 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
9010
9011 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9012 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9013 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9014 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9015 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9016 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9017 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9018 the last element of the kill ring.
9019
9020 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9021 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9022 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9023 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9024 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9025
9026 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9027 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9028 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9029 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9030 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9031 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9032 @code{setcdr}}.)
9033
9034 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9035 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9036 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9037 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9038
9039 @smallexample
9040 @group
9041 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9042 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9043 @end group
9044
9045 @group
9046 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9047 @result{} nil
9048
9049 trees
9050 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9051 @end group
9052 @end smallexample
9053
9054 @noindent
9055 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9056 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9057
9058 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9059 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9060 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9061 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9062 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9063
9064 @need 800
9065 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9066
9067 @smallexample
9068 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9069 @end smallexample
9070
9071 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9072 the @code{kill-ring}.
9073
9074 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9075 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9076 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9077
9078 @need 1200
9079 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9080
9081 @smallexample
9082 @group
9083 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9084 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9085 @end group
9086 @end smallexample
9087
9088 @noindent
9089 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9090
9091 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9092 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9093 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9094 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9095 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9096 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9097 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9098
9099 @noindent
9100 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9101 function @code{and}.
9102
9103 @findex and
9104 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9105 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9106 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9107 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9108 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9109 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9110 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9111 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9112
9113 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9114 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9115 @ignore
9116 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9117 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9118 @end ignore
9119
9120 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9121 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9122 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9123 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9124
9125 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9126 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9127 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9128 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9129 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9130 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9131
9132 @need 1200
9133 The expression looks like this:
9134
9135 @smallexample
9136 @group
9137 (if interprogram-cut-function
9138 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9139 @end group
9140 @end smallexample
9141
9142 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9143 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9144 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9145 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9146 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9147
9148 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9149 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9150 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9151
9152 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9153 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9154 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9155 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9156 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9157 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9158 that, we will digress into C.
9159
9160 @ignore
9161 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9162
9163 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9164 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9165 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9166 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9167
9168 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9169 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9170 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9171 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9172 order is correct.)
9173
9174 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9175 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9176 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9177 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9178 @end ignore
9179 @ignore
9180
9181 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9182 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9183
9184 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9185 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9186
9187 2006 Oct 24
9188 In Emacs 22,
9189 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9190 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9191 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9192 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9193
9194 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9195 @end ignore
9196
9197 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9198 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9199 @section Digression into C
9200 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9201 @cindex C, a digression into
9202 @cindex Digression into C
9203
9204 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9205 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9206 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9207 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9208 back.
9209
9210 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9211 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9212 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9213 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9214 describe it here.
9215
9216 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9217 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9218
9219 @need 1500
9220 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9221 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9222 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9223 like this:
9224
9225 @smallexample
9226 @group
9227 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9228 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9229 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9230 without the text properties.
9231 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9232 they can be in either order. */)
9233 (start, end)
9234 Lisp_Object start, end;
9235 @{
9236 register int b, e;
9237
9238 validate_region (&start, &end);
9239 b = XINT (start);
9240 e = XINT (end);
9241
9242 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9243 @}
9244 @end group
9245 @end smallexample
9246
9247 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9248 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9249 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9250 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9251 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9252
9253 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9254 parentheses:
9255
9256 @itemize @bullet
9257 @item
9258 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9259 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9260
9261 @item
9262 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9263 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9264 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9265 instead.
9266
9267 @item
9268 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9269 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9270 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9271
9272 @item
9273 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9274 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9275 arguments.
9276
9277 @item
9278 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9279 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9280 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9281 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9282 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9283
9284 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9285 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9286 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9287 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9288 and provides a prompt.
9289
9290 @item
9291 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9292 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9293 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9294 return.
9295
9296 @need 1000
9297 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9298 written like this:
9299
9300 @smallexample
9301 @group
9302 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9303 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9304 @end group
9305 @end smallexample
9306 @end itemize
9307
9308 @need 1200
9309 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9310 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9311 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9312 consists of the following four lines:
9313
9314 @smallexample
9315 @group
9316 validate_region (&start, &end);
9317 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9318 return build_string ("");
9319 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9320 @end group
9321 @end smallexample
9322
9323 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9324 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9325 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9326 then return and empty string.
9327
9328 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9329 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9330 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9331 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9332 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9333
9334 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9335 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9336 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9337 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9338 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9339
9340 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9341 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9342 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9343 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9344
9345 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9346 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9347
9348 @need 800
9349 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9350
9351 @smallexample
9352 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9353 @end smallexample
9354
9355 @noindent
9356 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9357 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9358
9359 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9360 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9361 all work.
9362
9363 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9364 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9365 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9366 @findex defvar
9367 @cindex Initializing a variable
9368 @cindex Variable initialization
9369
9370 @ignore
9371 2006 Oct 24
9372 In Emacs 22,
9373 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9374 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9375 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9376 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9377
9378 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9379
9380 @end ignore
9381
9382 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9383 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9384 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9385 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9386 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9387 form.
9388
9389 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9390 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9391 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9392
9393 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9394 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9395 name comes from ``define variable''.
9396
9397 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9398 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9399 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9400 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9401 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9402 documentation string.
9403
9404 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9405 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9406 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9407
9408 @menu
9409 * See variable current value::
9410 * defvar and asterisk::
9411 @end menu
9412
9413 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9414 @ifnottex
9415 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9416 @end ifnottex
9417
9418 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9419 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9420 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9421 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9422 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9423 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9424 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9425 @code{kill-ring}:
9426
9427 @smallexample
9428 @group
9429 Documentation:
9430 List of killed text sequences.
9431 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9432 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9433 @end group
9434 @group
9435 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9436 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9437 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9438 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9439 ring directly.
9440 @end group
9441 @end smallexample
9442
9443 @need 800
9444 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9445
9446 @smallexample
9447 @group
9448 (defvar kill-ring nil
9449 "List of killed text sequences.
9450 @dots{}")
9451 @end group
9452 @end smallexample
9453
9454 @noindent
9455 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9456 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9457 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9458 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9459 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9460 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9461 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9462 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9463 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9464
9465 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9466 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9467 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9468 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9469
9470 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9471 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9472 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9473 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9474 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9475 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9476 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9477
9478 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9479 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9480 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9481 documentation string. For example:
9482
9483 @smallexample
9484 @group
9485 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9486 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9487 @dots{} ")
9488 @end group
9489 @end smallexample
9490
9491 @findex set-variable
9492 @noindent
9493 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9494 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9495 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9496 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9497 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9498 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9499 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9500 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9501
9502 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9503 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9504 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9505 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9506 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9507 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9508 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9509
9510 @need 1250
9511 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9512 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9513 @section Review
9514
9515 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9516
9517 @table @code
9518 @item car
9519 @itemx cdr
9520 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9521 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9522
9523 @need 1250
9524 For example:
9525
9526 @smallexample
9527 @group
9528 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9529 @result{} 1
9530 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9531 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9532 @end group
9533 @end smallexample
9534
9535 @item cons
9536 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9537 second argument.
9538
9539 @need 1250
9540 For example:
9541
9542 @smallexample
9543 @group
9544 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9545 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9546 @end group
9547 @end smallexample
9548
9549 @item funcall
9550 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9551 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9552
9553 @item nthcdr
9554 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9555 @iftex
9556 The
9557 @tex
9558 $n^{th}$
9559 @end tex
9560 @code{cdr}.
9561 @end iftex
9562 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9563
9564 @need 1250
9565 For example:
9566
9567 @smallexample
9568 @group
9569 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9570 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9571 @end group
9572 @end smallexample
9573
9574 @item setcar
9575 @itemx setcdr
9576 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9577 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9578
9579 @need 1250
9580 For example:
9581
9582 @smallexample
9583 @group
9584 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9585
9586 (setcar triple '37)
9587
9588 triple
9589 @result{} (37 2 3)
9590
9591 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9592
9593 triple
9594 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9595 @end group
9596 @end smallexample
9597
9598 @item progn
9599 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9600 last.
9601
9602 @need 1250
9603 For example:
9604
9605 @smallexample
9606 @group
9607 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9608 @result{} 4
9609 @end group
9610 @end smallexample
9611
9612 @item save-restriction
9613 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9614 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9615
9616 @item search-forward
9617 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9618 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9619 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9620 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9621
9622 @need 1250
9623 @noindent
9624 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9625 arguments:
9626
9627 @enumerate
9628 @item
9629 The string or regular expression to search for.
9630
9631 @item
9632 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9633
9634 @item
9635 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9636 error message.
9637
9638 @item
9639 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9640 search goes backwards.
9641 @end enumerate
9642
9643 @item kill-region
9644 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9645 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9646
9647 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9648 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9649 by yanking.
9650
9651 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9652 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9653 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9654 @end table
9655
9656 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9657 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9658 (This is not an interactive command.)
9659
9660 @need 1500
9661 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9662 @section Searching Exercises
9663
9664 @itemize @bullet
9665 @item
9666 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9667 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9668 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9669 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9670 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9671 @code{test-search} instead.)
9672
9673 @item
9674 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9675 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9676 print an appropriate message.
9677 @end itemize
9678
9679 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9680 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9681 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9682 @cindex Lists in a computer
9683
9684 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9685 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9686 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9687 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9688 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9689 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9690 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9691 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9692 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9693 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9694
9695 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9696 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9697
9698 @menu
9699 * Lists diagrammed::
9700 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9701 * List Exercise::
9702 @end menu
9703
9704 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9705 @ifnottex
9706 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9707 @end ifnottex
9708
9709 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9710 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9711 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9712 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9713 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9714 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9715 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9716
9717 @need 1200
9718 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9719
9720 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9721 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9722 @ifnottex
9723 @smallexample
9724 @group
9725 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9726 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9727 | | |
9728 | | |
9729 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9730 @end group
9731 @end smallexample
9732 @end ifnottex
9733 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9734 @sp 1
9735 @tex
9736 @center @image{cons-1}
9737 %%%% old method of including an image
9738 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9739 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9740 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9741 @end tex
9742 @sp 1
9743 @end ifset
9744 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9745 @iftex
9746 @smallexample
9747 @group
9748 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9749 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9750 | | |
9751 | | |
9752 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9753 @end group
9754 @end smallexample
9755 @end iftex
9756 @end ifclear
9757
9758 @noindent
9759 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9760 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9761 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9762 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9763 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9764 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9765 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9766 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9767 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9768
9769 @need 1200
9770 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9771 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9772 evaluation of the expression
9773
9774 @smallexample
9775 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9776 @end smallexample
9777
9778 @need 1250
9779 @noindent
9780 creates a situation like this:
9781
9782 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9783 @ifnottex
9784 @smallexample
9785 @group
9786 bouquet
9787 |
9788 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9789 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9790 | | |
9791 | | |
9792 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9793 @end group
9794 @end smallexample
9795 @end ifnottex
9796 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9797 @sp 1
9798 @tex
9799 @center @image{cons-2}
9800 %%%% old method of including an image
9801 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9802 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9803 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9804 @end tex
9805 @sp 1
9806 @end ifset
9807 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9808 @iftex
9809 @smallexample
9810 @group
9811 bouquet
9812 |
9813 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9814 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9815 | | |
9816 | | |
9817 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9818 @end group
9819 @end smallexample
9820 @end iftex
9821 @end ifclear
9822
9823 @noindent
9824 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9825 pair of boxes.
9826
9827 @need 1200
9828 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9829 like this:
9830
9831 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9832 @ifnottex
9833 @smallexample
9834 @group
9835 bouquet
9836 |
9837 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9838 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9839 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9840 | | | | | | | cup | |
9841 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9842 @end group
9843 @end smallexample
9844 @end ifnottex
9845 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9846 @sp 1
9847 @tex
9848 @center @image{cons-2a}
9849 %%%% old method of including an image
9850 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9851 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9852 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9853 @end tex
9854 @sp 1
9855 @end ifset
9856 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9857 @iftex
9858 @smallexample
9859 @group
9860 bouquet
9861 |
9862 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9863 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9864 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9865 | | | | | | | cup | |
9866 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9867 @end group
9868 @end smallexample
9869 @end iftex
9870 @end ifclear
9871
9872 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9873 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9874 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9875 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9876 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9877 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9878 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9879 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9880 address-boxes for the list.)
9881
9882 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9883 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9884 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9885 evaluation of the following expression
9886
9887 @smallexample
9888 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9889 @end smallexample
9890
9891 @need 800
9892 @noindent
9893 produces this:
9894
9895 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9896 @ifnottex
9897 @sp 1
9898 @smallexample
9899 @group
9900 bouquet flowers
9901 | |
9902 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9903 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9904 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9905 | | |
9906 | | |
9907 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9908 @end group
9909 @end smallexample
9910 @sp 1
9911 @end ifnottex
9912 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9913 @sp 1
9914 @tex
9915 @center @image{cons-3}
9916 %%%% old method of including an image
9917 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9918 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9919 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9920 @end tex
9921 @sp 1
9922 @end ifset
9923 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9924 @iftex
9925 @sp 1
9926 @smallexample
9927 @group
9928 bouquet flowers
9929 | |
9930 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9931 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9932 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9933 | | |
9934 | | |
9935 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9936 @end group
9937 @end smallexample
9938 @sp 1
9939 @end iftex
9940 @end ifclear
9941
9942 @noindent
9943 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9944 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9945 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9946 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9947
9948 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9949 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9950 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9951 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9952 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9953
9954 @need 1200
9955 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9956 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9957 the expression
9958
9959 @smallexample
9960 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9961 @end smallexample
9962
9963 @need 1500
9964 @noindent
9965 produces:
9966
9967 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9968 @ifnottex
9969 @sp 1
9970 @smallexample
9971 @group
9972 bouquet flowers
9973 | |
9974 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9975 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9976 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9977 | | | |
9978 | | | |
9979 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9980 @end group
9981 @end smallexample
9982 @sp 1
9983 @end ifnottex
9984 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9985 @sp 1
9986 @tex
9987 @center @image{cons-4}
9988 %%%% old method of including an image
9989 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9990 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9991 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9992 @end tex
9993 @sp 1
9994 @end ifset
9995 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9996 @iftex
9997 @sp 1
9998 @smallexample
9999 @group
10000 bouquet flowers
10001 | |
10002 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10003 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
10004 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
10005 | | | |
10006 | | | |
10007 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
10008 @end group
10009 @end smallexample
10010 @sp 1
10011 @end iftex
10012 @end ifclear
10013
10014 @need 1200
10015 @noindent
10016 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10017 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10018
10019 @smallexample
10020 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10021 @end smallexample
10022
10023 @noindent
10024 which returns @code{t} for true.
10025
10026 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10027 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10028 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10029 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10030
10031 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10032 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10033 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10034 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10035 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10036 brilliantly simple!
10037
10038 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10039 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10040
10041 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10042 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10043
10044 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10045 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10046 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10047 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10048 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10049
10050 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10051 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10052 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10053 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10054 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10055
10056 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10057 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10058 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10059 where the buried treasure lies.
10060
10061 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10062 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10063 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10064 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10065 Reference Manual}.)
10066
10067 @need 1500
10068 Here is a fanciful representation:
10069
10070 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10071 @ifnottex
10072 @sp 1
10073 @smallexample
10074 @group
10075 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10076
10077 __ o0O0o __
10078 / \
10079 ---------------------
10080 | directions to | [map to]
10081 | symbol name | bouquet
10082 | |
10083 +---------------------+
10084 | directions to |
10085 | symbol definition | [none]
10086 | |
10087 +---------------------+
10088 | directions to | [map to]
10089 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10090 | |
10091 +---------------------+
10092 | directions to |
10093 | property list | [not described here]
10094 | |
10095 +---------------------+
10096 |/ \|
10097 @end group
10098 @end smallexample
10099 @sp 1
10100 @end ifnottex
10101 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10102 @sp 1
10103 @tex
10104 @center @image{drawers}
10105 %%%% old method of including an image
10106 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10107 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10108 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10109 @end tex
10110 @sp 1
10111 @end ifset
10112 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10113 @iftex
10114 @sp 1
10115 @smallexample
10116 @group
10117 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10118
10119 __ o0O0o __
10120 / \
10121 ---------------------
10122 | directions to | [map to]
10123 | symbol name | bouquet
10124 | |
10125 +---------------------+
10126 | directions to |
10127 | symbol definition | [none]
10128 | |
10129 +---------------------+
10130 | directions to | [map to]
10131 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10132 | |
10133 +---------------------+
10134 | directions to |
10135 | property list | [not described here]
10136 | |
10137 +---------------------+
10138 |/ \|
10139 @end group
10140 @end smallexample
10141 @sp 1
10142 @end iftex
10143 @end ifclear
10144
10145 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10146 @section Exercise
10147
10148 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10149 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10150 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10151 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10152
10153 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10154 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10155 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10156 @findex yank
10157 @cindex Text retrieval
10158 @cindex Retrieving text
10159 @cindex Pasting text
10160
10161 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10162 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10163 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10164 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10165 the original buffer).
10166
10167 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10168 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10169 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10170 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10171 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10172 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10173 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10174 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10175 that holds the text is a list.
10176 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10177 list is handled as a ring.)
10178
10179 @menu
10180 * Kill Ring Overview::
10181 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10182 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10183 @end menu
10184
10185 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10186 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10187 @section Kill Ring Overview
10188 @cindex Kill ring overview
10189
10190 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10191
10192 @smallexample
10193 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10194 @end smallexample
10195
10196 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10197 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10198 buffer where my cursor is located.
10199
10200 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10201 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10202 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10203
10204 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10205 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10206 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10207 which is used by the two other functions.
10208
10209 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10210 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10211 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10212
10213 @smallexample
10214 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10215 @end smallexample
10216
10217 @noindent
10218 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10219 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10220 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10221 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10222 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10223 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10224 is easier to understand.)
10225
10226 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10227 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10228
10229 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10230 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10231 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10232
10233 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10234 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10235 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10236
10237 @need 1000
10238 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10239
10240 @smallexample
10241 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10242 @end smallexample
10243
10244 @need 1250
10245 @noindent
10246 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10247 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10248
10249 @smallexample
10250 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10251 @end smallexample
10252
10253 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10254 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10255 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10256 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10257 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10258 text. Here is a diagram:
10259
10260 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10261 @ifnottex
10262 @smallexample
10263 @group
10264 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10265 | |
10266 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10267 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10268 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10269 | | |
10270 | | |
10271 | | --> "yet more text"
10272 | |
10273 | --> "a different piece of text"
10274 |
10275 --> "some text"
10276 @end group
10277 @end smallexample
10278 @sp 1
10279 @end ifnottex
10280 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10281 @sp 1
10282 @tex
10283 @center @image{cons-5}
10284 %%%% old method of including an image
10285 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10286 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10287 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10288 @end tex
10289 @sp 1
10290 @end ifset
10291 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10292 @iftex
10293 @smallexample
10294 @group
10295 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10296 | |
10297 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10298 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10299 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10300 | | |
10301 | | |
10302 | | --> "yet more text"
10303 | |
10304 | --> "a different piece of text
10305 |
10306 --> "some text"
10307 @end group
10308 @end smallexample
10309 @sp 1
10310 @end iftex
10311 @end ifclear
10312
10313 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10314 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10315 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10316 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10317 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10318 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10319
10320 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10321 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10322 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10323 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10324 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10325 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10326 inserted.
10327
10328 @ignore
10329 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10330
10331 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10332
10333 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10334 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10335 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10336 (interactive "p")
10337 (current-kill arg))
10338
10339 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10340 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10341 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10342 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10343 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10344 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10345 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10346 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10347 interprogram-paste-function
10348 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10349 (if interprogram-paste
10350 (progn
10351 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10352 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10353 ;; selection, with identical text.
10354 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10355 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10356 interprogram-paste)
10357 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10358 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10359 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10360 (length kill-ring))
10361 kill-ring)))
10362 (or do-not-move
10363 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10364 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10365
10366 @end ignore
10367
10368 @need 1500
10369 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10370 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10371
10372 @itemize @bullet
10373 @item
10374 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10375 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10376 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10377 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10378 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10379 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10380
10381 @item
10382 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10383 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10384 @end itemize
10385
10386 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10387 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10388 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10389 @cindex Loops and recursion
10390 @cindex Recursion and loops
10391 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10392
10393 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10394 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10395 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10396
10397 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10398 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10399 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10400 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10401 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10402 have on humans.
10403
10404 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10405 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10406 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10407 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10408 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10409 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10410 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10411 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10412 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10413 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10414 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10415
10416 @menu
10417 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10418 * dolist dotimes::
10419 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10420 * Looping exercise::
10421 @end menu
10422
10423 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10424 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10425 @section @code{while}
10426 @cindex Loops
10427 @findex while
10428
10429 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10430 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10431 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10432 next, however, is different.
10433
10434 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10435 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10436 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10437 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10438 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10439 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10440 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10441 body of the expression.
10442
10443 @need 1200
10444 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10445
10446 @smallexample
10447 @group
10448 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10449 @var{body}@dots{})
10450 @end group
10451 @end smallexample
10452
10453 @menu
10454 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10455 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10456 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10457 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10458 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10459 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10460 @end menu
10461
10462 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10463 @ifnottex
10464 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10465 @end ifnottex
10466
10467 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10468 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10469 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10470 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10471 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10472 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10473 expression and `exits the loop'.
10474
10475 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10476 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10477 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10478 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10479 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10480 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10481 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10482 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10483
10484 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10485 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10486 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10487 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10488 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10489 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10490 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10491 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10492 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10493 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10494 are repeatedly evaluated.
10495
10496 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10497 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10498 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10499
10500 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10501 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10502 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10503 create a short example to illustrate it.
10504
10505 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10506 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10507 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10508 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10509 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10510 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10511 @code{while} loop.
10512
10513 @need 1200
10514 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10515 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10516
10517 @smallexample
10518 (setq empty-list ())
10519 @end smallexample
10520
10521 @noindent
10522 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10523 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10524 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10525 echo area:
10526
10527 @smallexample
10528 empty-list
10529 @end smallexample
10530
10531 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10532 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10533 evaluating the following two expressions:
10534
10535 @smallexample
10536 @group
10537 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10538
10539 animals
10540 @end group
10541 @end smallexample
10542
10543 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10544 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10545 written like this:
10546
10547 @smallexample
10548 @group
10549 (while animals
10550 @dots{}
10551 @end group
10552 @end smallexample
10553
10554 @noindent
10555 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10556 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10557 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10558 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10559 to be false.
10560
10561 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10562 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10563 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10564 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10565 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10566 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10567 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10568 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10569
10570 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10571 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10572 following expression:
10573
10574 @smallexample
10575 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10576 @end smallexample
10577
10578 @noindent
10579 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10580 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10581 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10582 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10583 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10584
10585 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10586 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10587 looks like this:
10588
10589 @smallexample
10590 @group
10591 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10592 @var{body}@dots{}
10593 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10594 @end group
10595 @end smallexample
10596
10597 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10598 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10599 own.
10600
10601 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10602 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10603 @findex print-elements-of-list
10604
10605 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10606 loop with a list.
10607
10608 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10609 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10610 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10611 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10612 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10613
10614 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10615 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10616 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10617 earlier versions.
10618
10619 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10620 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10621 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10622 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10623 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10624 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10625 (@code{yank}).
10626
10627 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10628 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10629 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10630 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10631 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10632 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10633 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10634 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10635 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10636
10637 @need 1500
10638 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10639 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10640 results.
10641
10642 @smallexample
10643 @group
10644 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10645
10646 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10647 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10648 (while list
10649 (print (car list))
10650 (setq list (cdr list))))
10651
10652 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10653 @end group
10654 @end smallexample
10655
10656 @need 1200
10657 @noindent
10658 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10659 this:
10660
10661 @smallexample
10662 @group
10663 gazelle
10664
10665 giraffe
10666
10667 lion
10668
10669 tiger
10670 nil
10671 @end group
10672 @end smallexample
10673
10674 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10675 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10676 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10677 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10678 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10679
10680 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10681 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10682 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10683
10684 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10685 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10686 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10687 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10688 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10689 repeats itself.
10690
10691 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10692 @ifnottex
10693 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10694 @end ifnottex
10695
10696 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10697 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10698 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10699 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10700 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10701 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10702 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10703 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10704 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10705 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10706
10707 @need 1250
10708 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10709 counter looks like this:
10710
10711 @smallexample
10712 @group
10713 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10714 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10715 @var{body}@dots{}
10716 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10717 @end group
10718 @end smallexample
10719
10720 @noindent
10721 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10722 is set to 1.
10723
10724 @menu
10725 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10726 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10727 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10728 @end menu
10729
10730 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10731 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10732
10733 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10734 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10735 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10736
10737 @sp 1
10738 @c pebble diagram
10739 @ifnottex
10740 @smallexample
10741 @group
10742 *
10743 * *
10744 * * *
10745 * * * *
10746 @end group
10747 @end smallexample
10748 @end ifnottex
10749 @iftex
10750 @smallexample
10751 @group
10752 @bullet{}
10753 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10754 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10755 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10756 @end group
10757 @end smallexample
10758 @end iftex
10759 @sp 1
10760
10761 @noindent
10762 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10763 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10764
10765 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10766 triangle with 7 rows?
10767
10768 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10769 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10770 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10771 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10772 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10773 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10774 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10775
10776 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10777 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10778 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10779 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10780 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10781 a more complex process once.
10782
10783 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10784 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10785 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10786 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10787 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10788
10789 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10790 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10791 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10792 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10793 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10794 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10795 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10796
10797 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10798 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10799
10800 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10801 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10802 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10803 the function.
10804
10805 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10806 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10807 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10808
10809 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10810 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10811 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10812 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10813
10814 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10815 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10816 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10817 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10818 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10819 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10820 more rows left to add.
10821
10822 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10823 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10824 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10825 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10826 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10827 statement will look like this:
10828
10829 @smallexample
10830 @group
10831 (let ((total 0)
10832 (row-number 1))
10833 @var{body}@dots{})
10834 @end group
10835 @end smallexample
10836
10837 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10838 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10839 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10840 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10841 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10842 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10843 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10844 equal to the number of rows.)
10845
10846 @need 1500
10847 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10848 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10849 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10850 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10851 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10852
10853 @smallexample
10854 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10855 @end smallexample
10856
10857 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10858 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10859 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10860 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10861 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10862 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10863 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10864
10865 @smallexample
10866 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10867 @end smallexample
10868
10869 @noindent
10870 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10871 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10872
10873 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10874 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10875 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10876 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10877 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10878 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10879 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10880 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10881 repetition of the loop.
10882
10883 @need 1200
10884 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10885 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10886
10887 @smallexample
10888 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10889 @end smallexample
10890
10891 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10892 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10893
10894 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10895 put them together.
10896
10897 @need 800
10898 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10899
10900 @smallexample
10901 @group
10902 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10903 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10904 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10905 @end group
10906 @end smallexample
10907
10908 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10909 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10910 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10911
10912 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10913 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10914 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10915 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10916 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10917
10918 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10919 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10920 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10921 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10922 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10923 of the @code{let}.
10924
10925 @need 1250
10926 In outline, the function will look like this:
10927
10928 @smallexample
10929 @group
10930 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10931 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10932 (let (@var{varlist})
10933 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10934 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10935 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10936 @end group
10937 @end smallexample
10938
10939 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10940 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10941 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10942 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10943 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10944 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10945 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10946 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10947 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10948 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10949
10950 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10951 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10952 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10953 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10954 the last element:
10955
10956 @smallexample
10957 @group
10958 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10959 @end group
10960 @end smallexample
10961
10962 @need 1200
10963 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10964 looks like this:
10965
10966 @smallexample
10967 @group
10968 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10969 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10970 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10971 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10972 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10973 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10974 @end group
10975 @group
10976 (let ((total 0)
10977 (row-number 1))
10978 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10979 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10980 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10981 total))
10982 @end group
10983 @end smallexample
10984
10985 @need 1200
10986 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10987 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10988
10989 @smallexample
10990 @group
10991 (triangle 4)
10992
10993 (triangle 7)
10994 @end group
10995 @end smallexample
10996
10997 @noindent
10998 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10999 numbers is 28.
11000
11001 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
11002 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11003 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
11004
11005 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
11006 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
11007 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
11008 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
11009 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
11010 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11011 repeatedly.
11012
11013 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11014 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11015 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11016 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11017 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11018 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11019 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11020
11021 @need 1250
11022 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11023
11024 @smallexample
11025 @group
11026 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11027 @var{body}@dots{}
11028 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11029 @end group
11030 @end smallexample
11031
11032 @menu
11033 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11034 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11035 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11036 @end menu
11037
11038 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11039 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11040
11041 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11042 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11043
11044 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11045 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11046 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11047 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11048 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11049
11050 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11051 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11052 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11053 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11054 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11055 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11056 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11057 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11058
11059 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11060 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11061 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11062 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11063 the row.
11064
11065 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11066 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11067
11068 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11069 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11070 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11071 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11072 @code{total}, respectively.
11073
11074 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11075 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11076 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11077 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11078 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11079 the longest row.
11080
11081 @need 1250
11082 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11083 like this:
11084
11085 @smallexample
11086 @group
11087 (let ((total 0)
11088 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11089 @var{body}@dots{})
11090 @end group
11091 @end smallexample
11092
11093 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11094 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11095 evaluating the following expression:
11096
11097 @smallexample
11098 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11099 @end smallexample
11100
11101 @noindent
11102 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11103 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11104 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11105 added to the total.
11106
11107 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11108 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11109 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11110 done with the following expression:
11111
11112 @smallexample
11113 @group
11114 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11115 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11116 @end group
11117 @end smallexample
11118
11119 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11120 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11121 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11122
11123 @smallexample
11124 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11125 @end smallexample
11126
11127 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11128 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11129
11130 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11131 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11132 variables is unneeded!
11133
11134 @need 1250
11135 The function definition looks like this:
11136
11137 @smallexample
11138 @group
11139 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11140 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11141 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11142 (let ((total 0)
11143 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11144 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11145 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11146 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11147 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11148 total))
11149 @end group
11150 @end smallexample
11151
11152 As written, this function works.
11153
11154 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11155
11156 @cindex Argument as local variable
11157 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11158 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11159 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11160 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11161 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11162 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11163 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11164 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11165
11166 @need 800
11167 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11168
11169 @smallexample
11170 @group
11171 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11172 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11173 (let ((total 0))
11174 (while (> number 0)
11175 (setq total (+ total number))
11176 (setq number (1- number)))
11177 total))
11178 @end group
11179 @end smallexample
11180
11181 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11182
11183 @enumerate
11184 @item
11185 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11186 correct number of times.
11187
11188 @item
11189 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11190 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11191
11192 @item
11193 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11194 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11195 number of times.
11196 @end enumerate
11197
11198 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11199 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11200 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11201
11202 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11203 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11204 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11205 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11206
11207 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11208 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11209 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11210 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11211
11212 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11213
11214 @menu
11215 * dolist::
11216 * dotimes::
11217 @end menu
11218
11219 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11220 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11221 @findex dolist
11222
11223 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11224 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11225
11226 @need 1250
11227 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11228
11229 @smallexample
11230 @group
11231 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11232
11233 (reverse animals)
11234 @end group
11235 @end smallexample
11236
11237 @need 800
11238 @noindent
11239 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11240
11241 @smallexample
11242 @group
11243 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11244
11245 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11246 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11247 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11248 (while list
11249 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11250 (setq list (cdr list)))
11251 value))
11252
11253 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11254 @end group
11255 @end smallexample
11256
11257 @need 800
11258 @noindent
11259 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11260
11261 @smallexample
11262 @group
11263 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11264
11265 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11266 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11267 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11268 (dolist (element list value)
11269 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11270
11271 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11272 @end group
11273 @end smallexample
11274
11275 @need 1250
11276 @noindent
11277 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11278 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11279
11280 @smallexample
11281 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11282 @end smallexample
11283
11284 @noindent
11285 in the echo area.
11286
11287 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11288 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11289 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11290 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11291 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11292 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11293 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11294 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11295
11296 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11297 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11298 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11299 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11300 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11301 the loop.
11302
11303 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11304 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11305 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11306
11307 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11308 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11309 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11310 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11311 arguments.
11312
11313 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11314 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11315 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11316 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11317
11318 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11319 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11320 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11321 @code{value}.
11322
11323 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11324 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11325 @findex dotimes
11326
11327 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11328 loops a specific number of times.
11329
11330 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11331 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11332 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11333 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11334
11335 @need 1250
11336 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11337 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11338 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11339 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11340 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11341
11342 @smallexample
11343 @group
11344 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11345 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11346 (setq value (cons number value))))
11347
11348 @result{} (2 1 0)
11349 @end group
11350 @end smallexample
11351
11352 @noindent
11353 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11354 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11355 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11356
11357 @need 1250
11358 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11359 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11360
11361 @smallexample
11362 @group
11363 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11364 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11365 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11366 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11367 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11368
11369 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11370 @end group
11371 @end smallexample
11372
11373 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11374 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11375 @section Recursion
11376 @cindex Recursion
11377
11378 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11379 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11380 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11381 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11382 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11383 different `instance'.
11384
11385 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11386 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11387 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11388
11389 @menu
11390 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11391 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11392 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11393 * Recursive triangle function::
11394 * Recursion with cond::
11395 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11396 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11397 * No deferment solution::
11398 @end menu
11399
11400 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11401 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11402 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11403 @cindex Building robots
11404 @cindex Robots, building
11405
11406 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11407 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11408 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11409 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11410 passed different arguments than the first.
11411
11412 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11413 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11414 entity; but all are clones.
11415
11416 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11417 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11418 when to stop.
11419
11420 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11421
11422 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11423 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11424 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11425 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11426 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11427 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11428 but a different `serial number'.
11429
11430 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11431 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11432 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11433 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11434
11435 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11436 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11437
11438 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11439 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11440 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11441 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11442 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11443
11444 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11445 has three parts:
11446
11447 @enumerate
11448 @item
11449 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11450 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11451
11452 @item
11453 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11454 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11455
11456 @item
11457 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11458 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11459 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11460 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11461 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11462 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11463 @end enumerate
11464
11465 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11466 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11467 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11468 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11469 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11470
11471 @need 1200
11472 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11473 pattern looks like this:
11474
11475 @smallexample
11476 @group
11477 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11478 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11479 (if @var{do-again-test}
11480 @var{body}@dots{}
11481 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11482 @var{next-step-expression})))
11483 @end group
11484 @end smallexample
11485
11486 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11487 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11488
11489 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11490 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11491
11492 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11493
11494 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11495 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11496 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11497 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11498 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11499
11500 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11501 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11502
11503 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11504 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11505 @subsection Recursion with a List
11506
11507 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11508 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11509 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11510
11511 If you are using GNU Emacs 20 or before, this example must be copied
11512 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and each expression must be evaluated
11513 there. Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11514 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11515 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11516 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11517
11518 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11519 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11520 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11521
11522 If you are using a more recent version of Emacs, you can evaluate this
11523 expression directly in Info.
11524
11525 @findex print-elements-recursively
11526 @smallexample
11527 @group
11528 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11529
11530 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11531 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11532 Uses recursion."
11533 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11534 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11535 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11536 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11537
11538 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11539 @end group
11540 @end smallexample
11541
11542 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11543 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11544 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11545 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11546 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11547 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11548
11549 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11550 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11551 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11552 instance.
11553
11554 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11555 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11556 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11557
11558 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11559 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11560 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11561 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11562 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11563 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11564
11565 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11566 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11567 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11568 but is a separate individual.
11569
11570 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11571 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11572 works on a shorter list.
11573
11574 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11575 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11576 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11577 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11578 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11579
11580 @need 1200
11581 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11582 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11583
11584 @smallexample
11585 @group
11586 gazelle
11587
11588 giraffe
11589
11590 lion
11591
11592 tiger
11593 nil
11594 @end group
11595 @end smallexample
11596
11597 @need 2000
11598 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11599 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11600 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11601 @findex triangle-recursively
11602
11603 @need 1200
11604 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11605 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11606
11607 @smallexample
11608 @group
11609 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11610 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11611 Uses recursion."
11612 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11613 1 ; @r{then-part}
11614 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11615 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11616 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11617
11618 (triangle-recursively 7)
11619 @end group
11620 @end smallexample
11621
11622 @noindent
11623 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11624 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11625 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11626 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11627
11628 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11629 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11630 its argument.
11631
11632 @menu
11633 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11634 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11635 @end menu
11636
11637 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11638 @ifnottex
11639 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11640 @end ifnottex
11641
11642 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11643
11644 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11645 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11646 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11647 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11648 one row has one pebble in it.)
11649
11650 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11651 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11652
11653 @need 1200
11654 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11655 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11656 this:
11657
11658 @smallexample
11659 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11660 @end smallexample
11661
11662 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11663 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11664 in detail:
11665
11666 @table @i
11667 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11668
11669 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11670 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11671
11672 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11673
11674 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11675 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11676 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11677 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11678 function
11679
11680 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11681 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11682 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11683
11684 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11685
11686 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11687 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11688
11689 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11690
11691 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11692 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11693 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11694
11695 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11696 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11697 pebbles in it.
11698 @end table
11699
11700 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11701 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11702
11703 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11704 3.
11705
11706 @table @i
11707 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11708
11709 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11710 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11711 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11712 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11713 true.)
11714
11715 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11716
11717 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11718 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11719
11720 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11721
11722 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11723
11724 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11725 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11726 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11727
11728 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11729
11730 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11731 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11732 @end table
11733
11734 @noindent
11735 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11736
11737 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11738 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11739 called with an argument of 4:
11740
11741 @quotation
11742 @need 800
11743 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11744
11745 @smallexample
11746 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11747 @end smallexample
11748
11749 @need 800
11750 @noindent
11751 will return the value of evaluating
11752
11753 @smallexample
11754 (triangle-recursively 3)
11755 @end smallexample
11756
11757 @noindent
11758 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11759 third line.
11760 @end quotation
11761
11762 @noindent
11763 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11764
11765 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11766 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11767 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11768 evaluate itself.
11769
11770 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11771 requires that operations be deferred.
11772
11773 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11774 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11775 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11776 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11777 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11778 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11779 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11780 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11781
11782 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11783 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11784 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11785 on.
11786
11787 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11788 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11789
11790 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11791 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11792 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11793 @findex cond
11794
11795 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11796 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11797 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11798 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11799
11800 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11801 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11802 explaining it.
11803
11804 @need 800
11805 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11806
11807 @smallexample
11808 @group
11809 (cond
11810 @var{body}@dots{})
11811 @end group
11812 @end smallexample
11813
11814 @noindent
11815 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11816
11817 @need 800
11818 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11819
11820 @smallexample
11821 @group
11822 (cond
11823 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11824 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11825 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11826 @dots{})
11827 @end group
11828 @end smallexample
11829
11830 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11831 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11832 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11833 @code{cond}.
11834
11835 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11836 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11837 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11838 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11839 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11840 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11841 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11842 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11843 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11844
11845 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11846 returns @code{nil}.
11847
11848 @need 1250
11849 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11850
11851 @smallexample
11852 @group
11853 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11854 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11855 ((= number 1) 1)
11856 ((> number 1)
11857 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11858 @end group
11859 @end smallexample
11860
11861 @noindent
11862 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11863 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11864 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11865 1.
11866
11867 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11868 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11869 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11870 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11871
11872 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11873 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11874 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11875
11876 @menu
11877 * Every::
11878 * Accumulate::
11879 * Keep::
11880 @end menu
11881
11882 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11883 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11884 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11885 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11886 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11887
11888 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11889 element of a list.
11890
11891 @need 1500
11892 The basic pattern is:
11893
11894 @itemize @bullet
11895 @item
11896 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11897 @item
11898 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11899 @itemize @minus
11900 @item
11901 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11902 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11903 @item
11904 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11905 with the results of acting on the rest.
11906 @end itemize
11907 @end itemize
11908
11909 @need 1500
11910 Here is example:
11911
11912 @smallexample
11913 @group
11914 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11915 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11916 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11917 nil
11918 (cons
11919 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11920 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11921 @end group
11922
11923 @group
11924 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11925 @result{} (1 4 9)
11926 @end group
11927 @end smallexample
11928
11929 @need 1200
11930 @noindent
11931 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11932 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11933 with the result of the recursive call.
11934
11935 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11936 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11937 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11938 empty.)
11939
11940 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11941 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11942 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11943 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11944
11945 @need 1250
11946 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11947
11948 @smallexample
11949 @group
11950 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11951 @end group
11952
11953 @group
11954 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11955 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11956 Uses recursion."
11957 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11958 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11959 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11960 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11961
11962 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11963 @end group
11964 @end smallexample
11965
11966 @need 1500
11967 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11968
11969 @itemize @bullet
11970 @item
11971 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11972 @item
11973 But when the list has at least one element,
11974 @itemize @minus
11975 @item
11976 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11977 @item
11978 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11979 @end itemize
11980 @end itemize
11981
11982 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11983 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11984 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11985 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11986 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11987
11988 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11989 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11990 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11991 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11992
11993 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11994 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11995
11996 @need 1500
11997 The pattern is:
11998
11999 @itemize @bullet
12000 @item
12001 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
12002 @item
12003 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
12004 @itemize @minus
12005 @item
12006 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
12007 some other combining function, with
12008 @item
12009 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12010 @end itemize
12011 @end itemize
12012
12013 @need 1500
12014 Here is an example:
12015
12016 @smallexample
12017 @group
12018 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12019 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12020 (if (not numbers-list)
12021 0
12022 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12023 @end group
12024
12025 @group
12026 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12027 @result{} 10
12028 @end group
12029 @end smallexample
12030
12031 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12032 accumulate pattern.
12033
12034 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12035 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12036 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12037 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12038 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12039
12040 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12041 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12042 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12043 meets a criterion.
12044
12045 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12046 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12047
12048 @need 1500
12049 The pattern has three parts:
12050
12051 @itemize @bullet
12052 @item
12053 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12054 @item
12055 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12056 a test
12057 @itemize @minus
12058 @item
12059 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12060 @item
12061 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12062 @end itemize
12063 @item
12064 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12065 the test
12066 @itemize @minus
12067 @item
12068 skip on that element,
12069 @item
12070 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12071 @end itemize
12072 @end itemize
12073
12074 @need 1500
12075 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12076
12077 @smallexample
12078 @group
12079 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12080 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12081 (cond
12082 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12083 ((not word-list) nil)
12084
12085 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12086 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12087 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12088 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12089
12090 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12091 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12092 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12093 @end group
12094
12095 @group
12096 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12097 @result{} (one two six)
12098 @end group
12099 @end smallexample
12100
12101 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12102 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12103
12104 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12105 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12106 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12107 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12108
12109 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12110 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12111 deferred until all can be done.
12112
12113 @need 800
12114 Here is the function definition:
12115
12116 @smallexample
12117 @group
12118 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12119 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12120 Uses recursion."
12121 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12122 1 ; @r{then-part}
12123 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12124 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12125 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12126 @end group
12127 @end smallexample
12128
12129 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12130
12131 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12132 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12133 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12134 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12135
12136 @smallexample
12137 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12138 @end smallexample
12139
12140 @noindent
12141 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12142 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12143 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12144 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12145 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12146 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12147 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12148 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12149
12150 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12151 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12152 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12153 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12154
12155 @need 800
12156 Now the total is:
12157
12158 @smallexample
12159 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12160 @end smallexample
12161
12162 @need 800
12163 And what happens next?
12164
12165 @smallexample
12166 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12167 @end smallexample
12168
12169 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12170 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12171 asks it to make a calculation.
12172
12173 @need 800
12174 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12175
12176 @smallexample
12177 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12178 @end smallexample
12179
12180 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12181 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12182 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12183 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12184 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12185 more steps.
12186
12187 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12188 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12189 @cindex No deferment solution
12190 @cindex Defermentless solution
12191 @cindex Solution without deferment
12192
12193 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12194 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12195 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12196 `constant space'.}. This requires
12197 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12198 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12199 function.
12200
12201 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12202 does the work.
12203
12204 @need 1200
12205 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12206 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12207
12208 @smallexample
12209 @group
12210 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12211 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12212 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12213 duo that uses recursion."
12214 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12215 @end group
12216 @end smallexample
12217
12218 @smallexample
12219 @group
12220 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12221 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12222 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12223 that uses recursion."
12224 (if (> counter number)
12225 sum
12226 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12227 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12228 number))) ; @r{number}
12229 @end group
12230 @end smallexample
12231
12232 @need 1250
12233 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12234 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12235
12236 @smallexample
12237 @group
12238 (triangle-initialization 2)
12239 @result{} 3
12240 @end group
12241 @end smallexample
12242
12243 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12244 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12245 number of rows in the triangle.
12246
12247 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12248 initialization values. These values are changed when
12249 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12250 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12251 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12252 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12253 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12254 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12255 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12256 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12257 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12258
12259 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12260 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12261
12262 @need 1200
12263 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12264 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12265 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12266
12267 @smallexample
12268 (> 0 1)
12269 @end smallexample
12270
12271 @need 1200
12272 @noindent
12273 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12274 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12275
12276 @smallexample
12277 @group
12278 (triangle-recursive-helper
12279 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12280 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12281 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12282 @end group
12283 @end smallexample
12284
12285 @need 800
12286 @noindent
12287 which will first compute:
12288
12289 @smallexample
12290 @group
12291 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12292 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12293 1) ; @r{number}
12294 @exdent which is:
12295
12296 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12297 @end group
12298 @end smallexample
12299
12300 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12301 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12302 new instance with new arguments.
12303
12304 @need 800
12305 This new instance will be;
12306
12307 @smallexample
12308 @group
12309 (triangle-recursive-helper
12310 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12311 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12312 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12313
12314 @exdent which is:
12315
12316 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12317 @end group
12318 @end smallexample
12319
12320 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12321 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12322 expected.
12323
12324 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12325 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12326
12327 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12328
12329 @need 800
12330 In stages, the instances called will be:
12331
12332 @smallexample
12333 @group
12334 @r{sum counter number}
12335 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12336
12337 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12338
12339 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12340 @end group
12341 @end smallexample
12342
12343 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12344 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12345 which will be 3.
12346
12347 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12348 many resources in a computer.
12349
12350 @need 1500
12351 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12352 @section Looping Exercise
12353
12354 @itemize @bullet
12355 @item
12356 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12357 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12358
12359 @item
12360 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12361 adds the values.
12362
12363 @item
12364 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12365 using @code{cond}.
12366
12367 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12368 @item
12369 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12370 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12371 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12372 written in Texinfo.)
12373
12374 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12375 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12376 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12377 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12378 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12379 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12380 backwards.
12381
12382 For more information, see
12383 @ifinfo
12384 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12385 @end ifinfo
12386 @ifhtml
12387 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12388 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12389 Internet, see
12390 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12391 @end ifhtml
12392 @iftex
12393 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12394 Documentation Format}.
12395 @end iftex
12396 @end itemize
12397
12398 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12399 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12400 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12401 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12402 @cindex Regular expression searches
12403 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12404 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12405 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12406 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12407
12408 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12409 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12410 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12411 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12412 as `regexp'.
12413
12414 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12415 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12416 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12417 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12418 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12419 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12420 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12421 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12422 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12423 that spot.
12424
12425 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12426 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12427 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12428 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12429 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12430 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12431 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12432 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12433 introduces several new features.
12434
12435 @menu
12436 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12437 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12438 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12439 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12440 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12441 * Regexp Review::
12442 * re-search Exercises::
12443 @end menu
12444
12445 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12446 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12447 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12448 @findex sentence-end
12449
12450 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12451 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12452
12453 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12454 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12455 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12456 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12457
12458 @smallexample
12459 [.?!]
12460 @end smallexample
12461
12462 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12463 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12464 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12465 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12466
12467 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12468 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12469 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12470 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12471 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12472 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12473 items as alternatives.
12474
12475 @need 800
12476 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12477
12478 @smallexample
12479 @group
12480 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12481 ^ ^^
12482 TAB SPC
12483 @end group
12484 @end smallexample
12485
12486 @noindent
12487 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12488 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12489 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12490
12491 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12492 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12493 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12494 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12495
12496 @need 1000
12497 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12498 this:
12499
12500 @smallexample
12501 @group
12502 [
12503 ]*
12504 @end group
12505 @end smallexample
12506
12507 @noindent
12508 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12509 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12510 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12511
12512 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12513 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12514 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12515 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12516 expression that looks like this:
12517
12518 @smallexample
12519 []\"')@}]*
12520 @end smallexample
12521
12522 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12523 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12524 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12525 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12526
12527 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12528 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12529 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12530
12531 @smallexample
12532 @group
12533 sentence-end
12534 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12535 ]*"
12536 @end group
12537 @end smallexample
12538
12539 @noindent
12540 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12541 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12542 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12543 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12544 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12545 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12546 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12547 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12548 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12549 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12550 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12551 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12552 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12553
12554 @ignore
12555 @noindent
12556 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12557 literally in the pattern.)
12558
12559 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12560
12561 @table @code
12562 @item [.?!]
12563 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12564 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12565 begin with one or other of these characters.
12566
12567 @item []\"')@}]*
12568 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12569 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12570 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12571 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12572 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12573 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12574 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12575 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12576 more times.
12577
12578 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12579 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12580 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12581 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12582 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12583 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12584 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12585 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12586 indicate what they are.
12587
12588 @item [@key{RET}]*
12589 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12590 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12591 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12592 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12593 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12594 @end table
12595 @end ignore
12596
12597 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12598 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12599 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12600 @findex re-search-forward
12601
12602 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12603 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12604 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12605
12606 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12607 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12608 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12609 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12610 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12611 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12612
12613 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12614 four arguments:
12615
12616 @enumerate
12617 @item
12618 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12619 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12620
12621 @item
12622 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12623 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12624
12625 @item
12626 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12627 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12628 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12629 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12630 if the search succeeds.
12631
12632 @item
12633 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12634 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12635 @end enumerate
12636
12637 @need 800
12638 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12639
12640 @smallexample
12641 @group
12642 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12643 @var{limit-of-search}
12644 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12645 @var{repeat-count})
12646 @end group
12647 @end smallexample
12648
12649 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12650 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12651 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12652 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12653 to.
12654
12655 @need 1200
12656 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12657 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12658
12659 @smallexample
12660 @group
12661 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12662 ]*"
12663 @end group
12664 @end smallexample
12665
12666 @noindent
12667 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12668 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12669 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12670 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12671
12672 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12673 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12674 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12675 @findex forward-sentence
12676
12677 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12678 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12679 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12680 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12681 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12682 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12683
12684 @menu
12685 * Complete forward-sentence::
12686 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12687 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12688 @end menu
12689
12690 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12691 @ifnottex
12692 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12693 @end ifnottex
12694
12695 @need 1250
12696 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12697
12698 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12699 @smallexample
12700 @group
12701 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12702 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12703 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12704
12705 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12706 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12707 @end group
12708 @group
12709 (interactive "p")
12710 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12711 (let ((opoint (point))
12712 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12713 (while (< arg 0)
12714 (let ((pos (point))
12715 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12716 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12717 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12718 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12719 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12720 (goto-char par-beg)))
12721 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12722 @end group
12723 @group
12724 (while (> arg 0)
12725 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12726 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12727 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12728 (goto-char par-end)))
12729 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12730 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12731 @end group
12732 @end smallexample
12733
12734 @ignore
12735 GNU Emacs 21
12736 @smallexample
12737 @group
12738 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12739 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12740 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12741 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12742 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12743 terminates sentences as well."
12744 @end group
12745 @group
12746 (interactive "p")
12747 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12748 (while (< arg 0)
12749 (let ((par-beg
12750 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12751 (if (re-search-backward
12752 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12753 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12754 (goto-char par-beg)))
12755 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12756 (while (> arg 0)
12757 (let ((par-end
12758 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12759 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12760 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12761 (goto-char par-end)))
12762 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12763 @end group
12764 @end smallexample
12765 @end ignore
12766
12767 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12768 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12769 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12770
12771 @smallexample
12772 @group
12773 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12774 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12775 (interactive "p")
12776 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12777 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12778 (while (< arg 0)
12779 (let ((pos (point))
12780 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12781 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12782 (while (> arg 0)
12783 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12784 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12785 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12786 @end group
12787 @end smallexample
12788
12789 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12790 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12791 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12792
12793 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12794
12795 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12796
12797 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12798 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12799 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12800 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12801 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12802
12803 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12804 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12805 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12806 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12807 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12808 @code{nil}.
12809
12810 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12811 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12812 point, from before the search, is used in the
12813 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12814 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12815 @code{sentence-end} function.
12816
12817 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12818 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12819
12820 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12821 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12822 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12823 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12824 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12825 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12826 loop.
12827
12828 @need 1500
12829 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12830 looks like this:
12831
12832 @smallexample
12833 @group
12834 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12835 (let @var{varlist}
12836 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12837 @var{then-part}
12838 @var{else-part}
12839 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12840 @end group
12841 @end smallexample
12842
12843 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12844 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12845 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12846 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12847 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12848 the loop repeats.
12849
12850 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12851 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12852 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12853
12854 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12855 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12856 @code{if} expression.
12857
12858 @need 1250
12859 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12860
12861 @smallexample
12862 @group
12863 (let ((par-end
12864 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12865 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12866 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12867 (goto-char par-end)))
12868 @end group
12869 @end smallexample
12870
12871 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12872 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12873 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12874 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12875 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12876
12877 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12878 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12879 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12880 evaluates the expression
12881
12882 @smallexample
12883 @group
12884 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12885 @end group
12886 @end smallexample
12887
12888 @noindent
12889 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12890 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12891 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12892 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12893 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12894 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12895 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12896
12897 @need 1200
12898 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12899 expression that looks like this:
12900
12901 @smallexample
12902 @group
12903 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12904 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12905 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12906 @end group
12907 @end smallexample
12908
12909 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12910 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12911 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12912 expression is the regular expression search.
12913
12914 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12915 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12916 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12917
12918 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12919 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12920
12921 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12922 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12923 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12924 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12925
12926 @enumerate
12927 @item
12928 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12929 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12930
12931 @item
12932 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12933 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12934 successful.
12935 @end enumerate
12936
12937 @noindent
12938 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12939 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12940 conclusion of the search.
12941
12942 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12943 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12944 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12945 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12946 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12947 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12948 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12949 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12950 usually a period.
12951
12952 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12953 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12954 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12955 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12956 end of the paragraph.
12957
12958 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12959 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12960
12961 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12962 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12963 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12964 incorporating this pattern often.
12965
12966 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12967 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12968 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12969 @findex forward-paragraph
12970
12971 @ignore
12972 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12973 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12974 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12975 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12976 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12977
12978 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12979 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12980 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12981 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12982 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12983 (interactive "p")
12984 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12985 (let* ((opoint (point))
12986 (fill-prefix-regexp
12987 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12988 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12989 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12990 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12991 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12992 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12993 ;; work normally with indented text.
12994 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12995 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12996 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12997 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12998 paragraph-start))
12999 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
13000 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
13001 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
13002 paragraph-separate))
13003 (parsep
13004 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13005 (concat parsep "\\|"
13006 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
13007 parsep))
13008 ;; This is used for searching.
13009 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
13010 start found-start)
13011 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13012 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13013 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13014 (looking-at parsep))
13015 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13016 (setq start (point))
13017 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13018 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13019 (while (and (not (bobp))
13020 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13021 (looking-at parsep)))
13022 (forward-line -1))
13023 (if (bobp)
13024 nil
13025 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13026 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13027 (end-of-line)
13028 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13029 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13030 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13031 (let (multiple-lines)
13032 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13033 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13034 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13035 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13036 (unless (= (point) start)
13037 (setq multiple-lines t))
13038 (forward-line -1))
13039 (move-to-left-margin)
13040 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13041 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13042 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13043 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13044 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13045 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13046 ;; multiple-lines
13047 ;; (forward-line 1))
13048 (not (bobp)))
13049 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13050 (setq found-start t)
13051 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13052 ;; REAL parstart.
13053 (progn (setq start (point))
13054 (move-to-left-margin)
13055 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13056 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13057 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13058 (bobp)
13059 (get-text-property
13060 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13061 (setq found-start nil)
13062 (goto-char start))
13063 found-start)
13064 ;; Found one.
13065 (progn
13066 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13067 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13068 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13069 (while (and (not (eobp))
13070 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13071 (looking-at parsep)))
13072 (forward-line 1))
13073 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13074 (end-of-line 0)
13075 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13076 (forward-char 1)
13077 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13078 (if (not (bolp))
13079 (forward-line 1))))
13080 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13081 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13082
13083 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13084 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13085 (while (and (not (eobp))
13086 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13087 (looking-at parsep))
13088 (forward-line 1))
13089 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13090 ;; ... and one more line.
13091 (forward-line 1)
13092 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13093 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13094 (while (and (not (eobp))
13095 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13096 (not (looking-at parsep))
13097 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13098 (forward-line 1))
13099 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13100 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13101 (goto-char start)
13102 (not (eobp)))
13103 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13104 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13105 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13106 (and use-hard-newlines
13107 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13108 (forward-char 1))
13109 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13110 (goto-char start))))
13111 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13112 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13113 arg))
13114 @end ignore
13115
13116 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13117 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13118 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13119 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13120
13121 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13122 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13123 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13124 fill prefix.
13125
13126 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13127 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13128 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13129 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13130 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13131 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13132 prefixes.)
13133
13134 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13135 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13136 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13137 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13138 with the fill prefix.
13139
13140 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13141 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13142 This is an added complication.
13143
13144 @menu
13145 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13146 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13147 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13148 @end menu
13149
13150 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13151 @ifnottex
13152 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13153 @end ifnottex
13154
13155 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13156 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13157 can be daunting!
13158
13159 @need 800
13160 In outline, the function looks like this:
13161
13162 @smallexample
13163 @group
13164 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13165 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13166 (interactive "p")
13167 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13168 (let*
13169 @var{varlist}
13170 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13171 @dots{}
13172 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13173 @dots{}
13174 @end group
13175 @end smallexample
13176
13177 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13178 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13179
13180 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13181 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13182 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13183 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13184 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13185 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13186 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13187 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13188 familiar part of this function.
13189
13190 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13191 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13192
13193 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13194 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13195 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13196
13197 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13198 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13199 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13200 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13201
13202 @ignore
13203 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13204 @end ignore
13205
13206 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13207
13208 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13209 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13210 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13211 @code{found-start}.
13212
13213 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13214 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13215
13216 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13217 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13218 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13219
13220 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13221 evaluating the following list:
13222
13223 @smallexample
13224 @group
13225 (and fill-prefix
13226 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13227 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13228 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13229 @end group
13230 @end smallexample
13231
13232 @noindent
13233 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13234
13235 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13236 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13237 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13238 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13239 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13240 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13241 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13242 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13243 arguments are true.
13244 @findex and
13245
13246 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13247 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13248 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13249 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13250
13251 @table @code
13252 @item fill-prefix
13253 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13254 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13255 @code{nil}.
13256
13257 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13258 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13259 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13260 not a useful fill prefix.
13261
13262 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13263 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13264 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13265 true value such as @code{t}.
13266
13267 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13268 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13269 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13270 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13271 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13272 @end table
13273
13274 @findex regexp-quote
13275 @noindent
13276 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13277 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13278 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13279 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13280 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13281 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13282 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13283 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13284
13285 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13286 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13287 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13288 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13289 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13290
13291 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13292 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13293 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13294 @code{nil} or some other value.
13295
13296 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13297 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13298 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13299 what separates paragraphs.)
13300
13301 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13302 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13303 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13304 of the pattern.
13305
13306 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13307 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13308 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13309 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13310 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13311 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13312
13313 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13314 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13315 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13316
13317 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13318 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13319 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13320 section.
13321
13322 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13323 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13324
13325 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13326 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13327 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13328 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13329 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13330 forward one paragraph.
13331
13332 @ignore
13333 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13334
13335 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13336 (while (and (not (eobp))
13337 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13338 (looking-at parsep))
13339 (forward-line 1))
13340 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13341 ;; ... and one more line.
13342 (forward-line 1)
13343
13344 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13345 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13346 (while (and (not (eobp))
13347 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13348 (not (looking-at parsep))
13349 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13350 (forward-line 1))
13351
13352 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13353 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13354 (goto-char start)
13355 (not (eobp)))
13356 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13357 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13358 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13359 (and use-hard-newlines
13360 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13361 (forward-char 1))
13362
13363 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13364 (goto-char start))))
13365 @end ignore
13366
13367 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13368 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13369
13370 @need 800
13371 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13372
13373 @smallexample
13374 @group
13375 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13376 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13377
13378 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13379 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13380 (while (and (not (eobp))
13381 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13382 (looking-at parsep))
13383 (forward-line 1))
13384 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13385 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13386 ;; ... and one more line.
13387 (forward-line 1)
13388 @end group
13389
13390 @group
13391 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13392 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13393 ;; we go forward line by line
13394 (while (and (not (eobp))
13395 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13396 (not (looking-at parsep))
13397 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13398 (forward-line 1))
13399 @end group
13400
13401 @group
13402 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13403 ;; we go forward character by character
13404 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13405 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13406 (goto-char start)
13407 (not (eobp)))
13408 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13409 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13410 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13411 (and use-hard-newlines
13412 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13413 (forward-char 1))
13414 @end group
13415
13416 @group
13417 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13418 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13419 ;; for sp-parstart
13420 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13421 (goto-char start))))
13422 @end group
13423 @end smallexample
13424
13425 @findex eobp
13426 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13427 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13428 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13429 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13430 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13431 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13432 of @code{arg} by one.
13433
13434 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13435 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13436 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13437 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13438 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13439
13440 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13441 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13442 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13443
13444 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13445 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13446 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13447 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13448 margin of the current line.
13449
13450 @findex looking-at
13451 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13452 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13453 its argument.
13454
13455 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13456 sense as you come to understand it.
13457
13458 @need 800
13459 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13460
13461 @smallexample
13462 @group
13463 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13464 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13465 ;; we go forward line by line
13466 (while (and (not (eobp))
13467 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13468 (not (looking-at parsep))
13469 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13470 (forward-line 1))
13471 @end group
13472 @end smallexample
13473
13474 @noindent
13475 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13476 as four conditions are true:
13477
13478 @enumerate
13479 @item
13480 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13481
13482 @item
13483 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13484 not at the end of the buffer.
13485
13486 @item
13487 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13488
13489 @item
13490 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13491 @end enumerate
13492
13493 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13494 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13495 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13496 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13497
13498 @need 1250
13499 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13500
13501 @smallexample
13502 @group
13503 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13504 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13505 (goto-char start)
13506 (not (eobp)))
13507 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13508 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13509 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13510 (and use-hard-newlines
13511 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13512 (forward-char 1))
13513 @end group
13514 @end smallexample
13515
13516 @noindent
13517 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13518 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13519 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13520 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13521 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13522 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13523
13524 @need 800
13525 The two expressions,
13526
13527 @smallexample
13528 @group
13529 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13530 (goto-char start)
13531 @end group
13532 @end smallexample
13533
13534 @noindent
13535 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13536 search.
13537
13538 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13539 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13540 the last search.
13541
13542 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13543 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13544 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13545 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13546 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13547 @code{sp-parstart}.
13548
13549 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13550 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13551 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13552 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13553
13554 @findex match-beginning
13555 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13556 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13557 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13558 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13559 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13560 of that pattern.
13561
13562 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13563 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13564 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13565 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13566 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13567
13568 @need 1250
13569 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13570
13571 @smallexample
13572 @group
13573 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13574 (goto-char start))))
13575 @end group
13576 @end smallexample
13577
13578 @noindent
13579 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13580 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13581 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13582
13583 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13584 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13585
13586 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13587 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13588 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13589 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13590 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13591 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13592 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13593 a car with his eyes shut!)
13594
13595 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13596 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13597 @findex etags
13598 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13599
13600 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13601 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13602 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13603 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13604 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13605 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13606
13607 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13608 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13609 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13610 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13611 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13612 sources.)
13613
13614 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13615 lack one.
13616
13617 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13618 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13619 the name is in upper case letters.
13620
13621 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13622 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13623 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13624 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13625
13626 @need 1250
13627 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13628 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13629 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13630 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13631 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13632
13633 @smallexample
13634 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13635 @end smallexample
13636
13637 @noindent
13638 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13639
13640 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13641 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13642 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13643 Lisp files in that directory.
13644
13645 @need 1250
13646 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13647 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13648 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13649 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13650
13651 @smallexample
13652 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13653 @end smallexample
13654
13655 @need 1250
13656 Type
13657
13658 @smallexample
13659 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13660 @end smallexample
13661
13662 @noindent
13663 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13664 list of supported languages.
13665
13666 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13667 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13668 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13669 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13670 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13671 file name and contents.
13672
13673 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13674 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13675 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13676 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13677
13678 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13679 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13680 program to attempt to find it.
13681
13682 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13683 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13684 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13685 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13686 @file{TAGS} files.
13687
13688 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13689 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13690 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13691 visit-tags-table}.
13692
13693 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13694 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13695 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13696 @findex make tags
13697
13698 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13699 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13700 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13701 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13702 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13703
13704 @need 1250
13705 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13706 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13707
13708 @smallexample
13709 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13710 @end smallexample
13711
13712 @noindent
13713 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13714 as well as with some other source packages.)
13715
13716 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13717 Manual}.
13718
13719 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13720 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13721 @section Review
13722
13723 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13724
13725 @table @code
13726 @item while
13727 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13728 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13729 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13730
13731 @need 1250
13732 For example:
13733
13734 @smallexample
13735 @group
13736 (let ((foo 2))
13737 (while (> foo 0)
13738 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13739 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13740
13741 @result{} foo is 2.
13742 foo is 1.
13743 nil
13744 @end group
13745 @end smallexample
13746
13747 @noindent
13748 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13749 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13750 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13751 line.)
13752
13753 @item re-search-forward
13754 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13755 just after it.
13756
13757 @noindent
13758 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13759
13760 @enumerate
13761 @item
13762 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13763 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13764
13765 @item
13766 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13767
13768 @item
13769 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13770 error message.
13771
13772 @item
13773 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13774 search goes backwards.
13775 @end enumerate
13776
13777 @item let*
13778 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13779 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13780 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13781 variables bound earlier, if any.
13782
13783 @need 1250
13784 For example:
13785
13786 @smallexample
13787 @group
13788 (let* ((foo 7)
13789 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13790 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13791 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13792 @end group
13793 @end smallexample
13794
13795 @item match-beginning
13796 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13797 expression search.
13798
13799 @item looking-at
13800 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13801 which should be a regular expression.
13802
13803 @item eobp
13804 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13805 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13806 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13807 the buffer is narrowed.
13808 @end table
13809
13810 @need 1500
13811 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13812 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13813
13814 @itemize @bullet
13815 @item
13816 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13817 or more blank lines in sequence.
13818
13819 @item
13820 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13821 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13822 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13823 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13824 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13825 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13826 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13827 @end itemize
13828
13829 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13830 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13831 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13832 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13833
13834 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13835 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13836 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13837 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13838
13839 @menu
13840 * Why Count Words::
13841 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13842 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13843 * Counting Exercise::
13844 @end menu
13845
13846 @node Why Count Words, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words, Counting Words
13847 @ifnottex
13848 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13849 @end ifnottex
13850
13851 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13852 number of lines and words within a region.
13853
13854 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13855 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13856 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13857 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13858 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13859 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13860 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13861 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13862 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13863
13864 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13865 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13866 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13867
13868 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13869 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13870 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13871 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13872
13873 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13874 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13875 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13876 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13877 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13878 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13879 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13880 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13881 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13882
13883 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13884 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13885 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13886 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13887 or to a @code{while} loop.
13888
13889 @menu
13890 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13891 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13892 @end menu
13893
13894 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Whitespace Bug, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13895 @ifnottex
13896 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13897 @end ifnottex
13898
13899 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13900 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13901 interactive.
13902
13903 @need 800
13904 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13905
13906 @smallexample
13907 @group
13908 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13909 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13910 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13911 @var{body}@dots{})
13912 @end group
13913 @end smallexample
13914
13915 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13916
13917 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13918 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13919 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13920 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13921 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13922
13923 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13924 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13925 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13926 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13927 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13928 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13929 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13930 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13931 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13932 this is routine.
13933
13934 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13935 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13936 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13937 a message to the user.
13938
13939 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13940 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13941 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13942 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13943 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13944 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13945 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13946 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13947
13948 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13949 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13950 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13951 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13952 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13953
13954 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13955 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13956 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13957
13958 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13959 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13960 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13961 word by word.
13962
13963 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13964 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13965 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13966 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13967 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13968 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13969 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13970 the regexp must be optional.)
13971
13972 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13973 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13974 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13975 this is:
13976
13977 @smallexample
13978 \w+\W*
13979 @end smallexample
13980
13981 @noindent
13982 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13983 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13984 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13985 Reference Manual}.
13986
13987 @need 800
13988 The search expression looks like this:
13989
13990 @smallexample
13991 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13992 @end smallexample
13993
13994 @noindent
13995 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13996 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13997 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13998 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13999 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
14000 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
14001 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
14002 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
14003
14004 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
14005 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
14006 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
14007
14008 @smallexample
14009 (setq count (1+ count))
14010 @end smallexample
14011
14012 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
14013 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14014 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14015 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14016 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14017 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14018 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14019 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14020 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14021 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14022 special form is appropriate.
14023
14024 @need 1500
14025 All this leads to the following function definition:
14026
14027 @smallexample
14028 @group
14029 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14030 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14031 "Print number of words in the region.
14032 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14033 character followed by at least one character that
14034 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14035 table determines which characters these are."
14036 (interactive "r")
14037 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14038 @end group
14039
14040 @group
14041 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14042 (save-excursion
14043 (goto-char beginning)
14044 (let ((count 0))
14045 @end group
14046
14047 @group
14048 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14049 (while (< (point) end)
14050 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14051 (setq count (1+ count)))
14052 @end group
14053
14054 @group
14055 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14056 (cond ((zerop count)
14057 (message
14058 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14059 ((= 1 count)
14060 (message
14061 "The region has 1 word."))
14062 (t
14063 (message
14064 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14065 @end group
14066 @end smallexample
14067
14068 @noindent
14069 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14070
14071 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
14072 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14073 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14074
14075 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
14076 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14077 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14078 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
14079 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14080 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14081 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14082 like this:
14083
14084 @smallexample
14085 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14086 @end smallexample
14087
14088 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14089 bugs yourself.
14090
14091 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14092 @ifinfo
14093 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14094 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14095
14096 @smallexample
14097 @group
14098 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14099 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14100 "Print number of words in the region.
14101 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14102 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14103 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14104 @end group
14105 @group
14106 (interactive "r")
14107 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14108 @end group
14109
14110 @group
14111 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14112 (save-excursion
14113 (goto-char beginning)
14114 (let ((count 0))
14115 @end group
14116
14117 @group
14118 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14119 (while (< (point) end)
14120 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14121 (setq count (1+ count)))
14122 @end group
14123
14124 @group
14125 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14126 (cond ((zerop count)
14127 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14128 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14129 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14130 @end group
14131 @end smallexample
14132 @end ifinfo
14133
14134 @need 1000
14135 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14136
14137 @smallexample
14138 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
14139 @end smallexample
14140
14141 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14142 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14143 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14144
14145 @smallexample
14146 one two three
14147 @end smallexample
14148
14149 @noindent
14150 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14151
14152 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14153 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14154 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
14155 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14156 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14157 that the region has one word!
14158
14159 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14160 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14161 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14162 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14163 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
14164 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14165 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14166 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14167
14168 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14169
14170 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14171 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14172 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14173 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14174 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14175 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14176 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14177 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14178 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14179 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14180 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14181 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14182 the marked region.
14183
14184 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14185 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14186 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14187 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14188 in the buffer, the search fails.
14189
14190 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14191 extend outside of the region.
14192
14193 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14194 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14195 simple as you might think.
14196
14197 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14198 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14199 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14200 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14201 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14202 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14203 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14204 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14205
14206 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
14207 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14208 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14209 to the regular expression search expression:
14210
14211 @smallexample
14212 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14213 @end smallexample
14214
14215 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14216 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14217 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14218 @samp{Search failed}.
14219
14220 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14221 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14222 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14223 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14224 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14225
14226 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14227 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14228 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14229
14230 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14231 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14232 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14233
14234 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14235 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14236 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14237 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14238 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14239 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14240 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14241 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14242 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14243 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14244 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14245
14246 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
14247 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14248 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14249 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14250 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14251 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14252
14253 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14254 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14255 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14256 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14257
14258 @smallexample
14259 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14260 @end smallexample
14261
14262 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14263 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14264 @iftex
14265 @noindent
14266 (For information about @code{and}, see
14267 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14268 @end iftex
14269 @ifinfo
14270 @noindent
14271 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14272 information about @code{and}.)
14273 @end ifinfo
14274
14275 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14276 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14277 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14278 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14279 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14280 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14281 other of its messages.
14282
14283 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14284 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14285 Here is what it looks like:
14286
14287 @smallexample
14288 @group
14289 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14290 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14291 "Print number of words in the region."
14292 (interactive "r")
14293 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14294 @end group
14295
14296 @group
14297 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14298 (save-excursion
14299 (let ((count 0))
14300 (goto-char beginning)
14301 @end group
14302
14303 @group
14304 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14305 (while (and (< (point) end)
14306 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14307 (setq count (1+ count)))
14308 @end group
14309
14310 @group
14311 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14312 (cond ((zerop count)
14313 (message
14314 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14315 ((= 1 count)
14316 (message
14317 "The region has 1 word."))
14318 (t
14319 (message
14320 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14321 @end group
14322 @end smallexample
14323
14324 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words
14325 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14326 @section Count Words Recursively
14327 @cindex Count words recursively
14328 @cindex Recursively counting words
14329 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14330
14331 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14332 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14333
14334 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14335 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14336 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14337 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14338
14339 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14340 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14341 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14342 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14343 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14344 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14345 message; the other will return the word count.
14346
14347 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14348 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14349
14350 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14351 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14352 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14353 determine how many words are in the region.
14354
14355 @need 1250
14356 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14357 previous versions:
14358
14359 @smallexample
14360 @group
14361 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14362 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14363 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14364 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14365 @end group
14366 @group
14367
14368 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14369 (@var{explanatory message})
14370 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14371 @end group
14372 @group
14373
14374 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14375 @var{recursive call}
14376 @end group
14377 @group
14378
14379 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14380 @var{message providing word count}))
14381 @end group
14382 @end smallexample
14383
14384 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14385 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14386 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14387 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14388 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14389 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14390 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14391 user.
14392
14393 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14394 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14395 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14396 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14397
14398 @need 1250
14399 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14400
14401 @smallexample
14402 @group
14403 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14404 "Print number of words in the region."
14405 (interactive "r")
14406 @end group
14407
14408 @group
14409 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14410 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14411 (save-excursion
14412 (goto-char beginning)
14413 @end group
14414
14415 @group
14416 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14417 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14418 @end group
14419
14420 @group
14421 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14422 (cond ((zerop count)
14423 (message
14424 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14425 ((= 1 count)
14426 (message
14427 "The region has 1 word."))
14428 (t
14429 (message
14430 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14431 @end group
14432 @end smallexample
14433
14434 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14435
14436 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14437 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14438
14439 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14440 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14441 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14442 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14443 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14444 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14445 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14446 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14447 argument.
14448
14449 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14450 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14451
14452 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14453 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14454 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14455 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14456 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14457 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14458
14459 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14460
14461 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14462 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14463
14464 @need 1250
14465 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14466
14467 @smallexample
14468 @group
14469 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14470 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14471 @var{do-again-test}
14472 @var{next-step-expression}
14473 @var{recursive call})
14474 @end group
14475 @end smallexample
14476
14477 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14478 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14479 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14480 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14481 function should return zero.
14482
14483 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14484 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14485
14486 @need 800
14487 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14488
14489 @smallexample
14490 @group
14491 (and (< (point) region-end)
14492 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14493 @end group
14494 @end smallexample
14495
14496 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14497 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14498 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14499 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14500 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14501
14502 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14503 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14504 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14505 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14506 search failed because there were no words to find.
14507
14508 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14509 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14510 part of the do-again-test.
14511
14512 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14513 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14514 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14515 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14516 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14517 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14518
14519 @need 1200
14520 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14521 function looks like this:
14522
14523 @smallexample
14524 @group
14525 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14526 ;; @r{then}
14527 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14528 ;; @r{else}
14529 @var{return-zero})
14530 @end group
14531 @end smallexample
14532
14533 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14534
14535 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14536 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14537 systematically.
14538
14539 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14540 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14541 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14542 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14543 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14544
14545 @need 800
14546 Consider several cases:
14547
14548 @itemize @bullet
14549 @item
14550 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14551 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14552 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14553 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14554
14555 @item
14556 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14557 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14558 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14559 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14560
14561 @item
14562 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14563 @end itemize
14564
14565 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14566 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14567 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14568 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14569
14570 @need 1200
14571 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14572 adds one to its argument.
14573
14574 @smallexample
14575 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14576 @end smallexample
14577
14578 @need 1200
14579 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14580 this:
14581
14582 @smallexample
14583 @group
14584 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14585 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14586
14587 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14588 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14589 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14590 @end group
14591
14592 @group
14593 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14594 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14595
14596 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14597 0))
14598 @end group
14599 @end smallexample
14600
14601 @need 1250
14602 Let's examine how this works:
14603
14604 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14605 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14606
14607 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14608 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14609 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14610 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14611 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14612 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14613 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14614
14615 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14616 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14617 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14618 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14619 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14620 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14621 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14622 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14623
14624 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14625 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14626 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14627 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14628 the correct amount.
14629
14630 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14631 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14632 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14633 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14634
14635 @need 1250
14636 @noindent
14637 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14638
14639 @need 1250
14640 @noindent
14641 The recursive function:
14642
14643 @findex recursive-count-words
14644 @smallexample
14645 @group
14646 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14647 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14648 @end group
14649
14650 @group
14651 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14652 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14653 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14654 @end group
14655
14656 @group
14657 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14658 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14659
14660 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14661 0))
14662 @end group
14663 @end smallexample
14664
14665 @need 800
14666 @noindent
14667 The wrapper:
14668
14669 @smallexample
14670 @group
14671 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14672 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14673 "Print number of words in the region.
14674 @end group
14675
14676 @group
14677 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14678 character followed by at least one character that is
14679 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14680 determines which characters these are."
14681 @end group
14682 @group
14683 (interactive "r")
14684 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14685 (save-excursion
14686 (goto-char beginning)
14687 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14688 @end group
14689 @group
14690 (cond ((zerop count)
14691 (message
14692 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14693 @end group
14694 @group
14695 ((= 1 count)
14696 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14697 (t
14698 (message
14699 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14700 @end group
14701 @end smallexample
14702
14703 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14704 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14705
14706 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14707 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14708 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14709
14710 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14711 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14712 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14713 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14714
14715 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14716 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14717 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14718 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14719 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14720 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14721 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14722
14723 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14724 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14725 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14726 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14727 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14728 and this will tell.
14729
14730 @menu
14731 * Divide and Conquer::
14732 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14733 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14734 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14735 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14736 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14737 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14738 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14739 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14740 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14741 @end menu
14742
14743 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14744 @ifnottex
14745 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14746 @end ifnottex
14747
14748 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14749 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14750 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14751 steps must be:
14752
14753 @itemize @bullet
14754 @item
14755 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14756 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14757
14758 @item
14759 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14760 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14761 function.
14762
14763 @item
14764 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14765 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14766 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14767 definitions within them.
14768
14769 @item
14770 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14771 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14772 a graph.
14773
14774 @item
14775 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14776 @end itemize
14777
14778 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14779 be difficult.
14780
14781 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14782 @section What to Count?
14783 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14784
14785 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14786 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14787 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14788 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14789 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14790 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14791 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14792 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14793 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14794 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14795 of ten words and symbols.
14796
14797 @smallexample
14798 @group
14799 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14800 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14801 (* 7 number))
14802 @end group
14803 @end smallexample
14804
14805 @noindent
14806 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14807 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14808 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14809 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14810 ten! Something is wrong!
14811
14812 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14813 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14814 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14815 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14816 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14817 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14818
14819 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14820 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14821 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14822 regexp is:
14823
14824 @smallexample
14825 "\\w+\\W*"
14826 @end smallexample
14827
14828 @noindent
14829 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14830 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14831 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14832 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14833 of its own.
14834
14835 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14836 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14837 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14838
14839 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14840 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14841 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14842 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14843 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14844 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14845 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14846 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14847 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14848
14849 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14850 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14851 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14852 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14853 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14854 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14855 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14856
14857 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14858 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14859
14860 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14861 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14862 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14863 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14864 constituent character; there are others, too.
14865
14866 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14867 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14868 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14869
14870 @need 1200
14871 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14872 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14873
14874 @smallexample
14875 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14876 @end smallexample
14877
14878 @noindent
14879 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14880 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14881 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14882 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14883 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14884 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14885 characters must be matched at least once.
14886
14887 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14888 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14889 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14890 I thought I could define this with the following:
14891
14892 @smallexample
14893 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14894 @end smallexample
14895
14896 @noindent
14897 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14898 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14899 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14900 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14901
14902 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14903 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14904 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14905 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14906 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14907 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14908 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14909 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14910 then followed optionally by white space.
14911
14912 @need 800
14913 Here is the full regular expression:
14914
14915 @smallexample
14916 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14917 @end smallexample
14918
14919 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14920 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14921 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14922
14923 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14924 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14925 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14926 versions.
14927
14928 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14929 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14930 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14931 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14932 simplify the definition a little.
14933
14934 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14935 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14936 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14937 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14938 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14939 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14940 function.
14941
14942 @need 1250
14943 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14944
14945 @smallexample
14946 @group
14947 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14948 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14949 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14950 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14951 @var{return count})
14952 @end group
14953 @end smallexample
14954
14955 @noindent
14956 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14957
14958 First, the set up.
14959
14960 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14961 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14962 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14963 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14964 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14965 end of the definition.
14966
14967 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14968 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14969 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14970 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14971 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14972 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14973 place point where we wish to start.
14974
14975 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14976 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14977 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14978
14979 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14980 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14981 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14982 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14983
14984 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14985 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14986 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14987 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14988 looping.
14989
14990 @need 1250
14991 The code looks like this:
14992
14993 @smallexample
14994 @group
14995 (beginning-of-defun)
14996 (let ((count 0)
14997 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14998 @end group
14999 @end smallexample
15000
15001 @noindent
15002 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
15003 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
15004 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
15005 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
15006 definition.
15007
15008 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
15009 is the @code{while} loop.
15010
15011 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
15012 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15013 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15014 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15015 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15016 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
15017
15018 @smallexample
15019 @group
15020 (while (and (< (point) end)
15021 (re-search-forward
15022 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
15023 (setq count (1+ count)))
15024 @end group
15025 @end smallexample
15026
15027 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15028 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15029 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15030 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15031
15032 @need 1250
15033 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15034
15035 @findex count-words-in-defun
15036 @smallexample
15037 @group
15038 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15039 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15040 (beginning-of-defun)
15041 (let ((count 0)
15042 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15043 @end group
15044 @group
15045 (while
15046 (and (< (point) end)
15047 (re-search-forward
15048 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15049 end t))
15050 (setq count (1+ count)))
15051 count))
15052 @end group
15053 @end smallexample
15054
15055 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15056 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15057 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15058 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
15059
15060 @smallexample
15061 @group
15062 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15063 (defun count-words-defun ()
15064 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15065 (interactive)
15066 (message
15067 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15068 @end group
15069 @group
15070 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15071 (cond
15072 ((zerop count)
15073 (message
15074 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15075 @end group
15076 @group
15077 ((= 1 count)
15078 (message
15079 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15080 (t
15081 (message
15082 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15083 @end group
15084 @end smallexample
15085
15086 @need 800
15087 @noindent
15088 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15089
15090 @smallexample
15091 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15092 @end smallexample
15093
15094 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15095 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15096 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15097
15098 @smallexample
15099 @group
15100 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15101 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15102 (* 7 number))
15103 @result{} 10
15104 @end group
15105 @end smallexample
15106
15107 @noindent
15108 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15109
15110 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15111 several definitions within a single file.
15112
15113 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15114 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15115
15116 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15117 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15118 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15119 statistics on one file.
15120
15121 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15122 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15123
15124 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15125 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15126 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15127 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15128 messages.
15129
15130 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15131 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15132 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15133 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15134 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15135
15136 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15137 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15138 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15139 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15140 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15141 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15142 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15143 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15144 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15145 is almost all there is to it.
15146
15147 @need 800
15148 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15149
15150 @smallexample
15151 @group
15152 (goto-char (point-min))
15153 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15154 (setq lengths-list
15155 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15156 @end group
15157 @end smallexample
15158
15159 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15160 contains the function definitions.
15161
15162 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15163 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15164 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15165
15166 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15167
15168 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15169 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15170 @section Find a File
15171 @cindex Find a File
15172
15173 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15174 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15175 problem.
15176
15177 @need 1200
15178 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15179
15180 @smallexample
15181 @group
15182 (defun find-file (filename)
15183 "Edit file FILENAME.
15184 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15185 creating one if none already exists."
15186 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15187 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15188 @end group
15189 @end smallexample
15190
15191 @noindent
15192 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15193 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15194 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15195 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15196 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15197
15198 @ignore
15199 In Emacs 22
15200 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15201 "Edit file FILENAME.
15202 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15203 creating one if none already exists.
15204 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15205 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15206 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15207
15208 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15209 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15210 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15211
15212 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15213 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15214 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15215 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15216 (if (listp value)
15217 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15218 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15219 @end ignore
15220
15221 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15222 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15223 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15224 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15225 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15226
15227 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15228 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15229 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15230 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15231 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15232 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15233
15234 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15235 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15236 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15237 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15238 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15239 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15240 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15241
15242 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15243 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15244 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15245 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15246 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15247 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15248 our own expression.
15249
15250 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15251
15252 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15253 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15254
15255 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15256 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15257 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15258 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15259 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15260 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15261 @findex lengths-list-file
15262
15263 @smallexample
15264 @group
15265 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15266 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15267 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15268 Each number is the number of words or
15269 symbols in one function definition."
15270 @end group
15271 @group
15272 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15273 (save-excursion
15274 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15275 (lengths-list))
15276 (set-buffer buffer)
15277 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15278 (widen)
15279 (goto-char (point-min))
15280 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15281 (setq lengths-list
15282 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15283 (kill-buffer buffer)
15284 lengths-list)))
15285 @end group
15286 @end smallexample
15287
15288 @noindent
15289 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15290 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15291 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15292 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15293 message.
15294
15295 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15296 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15297 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15298 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15299
15300 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15301 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15302 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15303 variable.
15304
15305 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15306
15307 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15308 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15309 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15310 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15311 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15312 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15313 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15314 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15315 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15316 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15317
15318 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15319 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15320 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15321 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15322 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15323 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15324 won't.
15325
15326 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15327 beginning of the buffer.
15328
15329 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15330 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15331 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15332
15333 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15334 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15335 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15336 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15337 of the files.
15338
15339 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15340 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15341 the whole function.
15342
15343 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15344 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15345 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15346
15347 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15348 @smallexample
15349 (lengths-list-file
15350 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15351 @end smallexample
15352
15353 @noindent
15354 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15355 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15356 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15357
15358 @need 1200
15359 @noindent
15360 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15361 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15362
15363 @smallexample
15364 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15365 @end smallexample
15366
15367 @noindent
15368 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15369 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15370
15371 @need 1200
15372 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15373 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15374
15375 @smallexample
15376 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15377 @end smallexample
15378
15379 @need 1500
15380 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15381 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15382
15383 @smallexample
15384 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15385 @end smallexample
15386
15387 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15388 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15389
15390 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15391 the list.
15392
15393 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15394 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15395
15396 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15397 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15398 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15399 a list of files.
15400
15401 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15402 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15403
15404 @menu
15405 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15406 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15407 @end menu
15408
15409 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15410 @ifnottex
15411 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15412 @end ifnottex
15413
15414 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15415 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15416 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15417 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15418 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15419 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15420 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15421 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15422 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15423
15424 @need 800
15425 The template looks like this:
15426
15427 @smallexample
15428 @group
15429 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15430 @var{body}@dots{}
15431 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15432 @end group
15433 @end smallexample
15434
15435 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15436 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15437 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15438 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15439 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15440 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15441 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15442 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15443 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15444 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15445
15446 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15447 @need 1250
15448 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15449
15450 @smallexample
15451 @group
15452 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15453 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15454 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15455 @end group
15456 @group
15457 (let (lengths-list)
15458
15459 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15460 (while list-of-files
15461 (setq lengths-list
15462 (append
15463 lengths-list
15464
15465 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15466 (lengths-list-file
15467 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15468 @end group
15469
15470 @group
15471 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15472 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15473
15474 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15475 lengths-list))
15476 @end group
15477 @end smallexample
15478
15479 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15480 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15481 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15482
15483 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15484 @need 1500
15485 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15486 Emacs is visiting the
15487 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15488
15489 @smallexample
15490 debug.el
15491 @end smallexample
15492
15493 @need 800
15494 @noindent
15495 becomes
15496
15497 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15498 @smallexample
15499 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15500 @end smallexample
15501
15502 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15503 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15504 itself.
15505
15506 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15507 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15508
15509 @need 800
15510 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15511
15512 @smallexample
15513 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15514 @end smallexample
15515
15516 @need 800
15517 @noindent
15518 produces the list
15519
15520 @smallexample
15521 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15522 @end smallexample
15523
15524 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15525 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15526 @code{cons},
15527
15528 @smallexample
15529 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15530 @end smallexample
15531
15532 @need 1250
15533 @noindent
15534 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15535 becomes the first element of the new list:
15536
15537 @smallexample
15538 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15539 @end smallexample
15540
15541 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15542 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15543
15544 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15545 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15546 is short and simple.
15547
15548 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15549 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15550 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15551 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15552 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15553 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15554 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15555 function is shorter than this description!
15556 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15557
15558 @smallexample
15559 @group
15560 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15561 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15562 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15563 (append
15564 (lengths-list-file
15565 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15566 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15567 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15568 @end group
15569 @end smallexample
15570
15571 @noindent
15572 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15573 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15574 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15575
15576 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15577 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15578 individually.
15579
15580 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15581 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15582 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15583 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15584 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15585 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15586
15587 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15588 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15589 Emacs may produce different results.)
15590
15591 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15592 @smallexample
15593 @group
15594 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15595
15596 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15597 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15598 @end group
15599
15600 @group
15601 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15602 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15603 @end group
15604
15605 @group
15606 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15607 @result{} (85 181)
15608 @end group
15609
15610 @group
15611 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15612 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15613 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15614 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15615 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15616 @end group
15617 @end smallexample
15618
15619 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15620 output we want.
15621
15622 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15623
15624 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15625 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15626
15627 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15628 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15629 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15630 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15631 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15632 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15633 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15634
15635 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15636 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15637 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15638 numbers.
15639
15640 @menu
15641 * Data for Display in Detail::
15642 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15643 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15644 * Counting function definitions::
15645 @end menu
15646
15647 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15648 @ifnottex
15649 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15650 @end ifnottex
15651
15652 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15653 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15654 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15655 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15656
15657 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15658 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15659 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15660 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15661 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15662 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15663 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15664 that we will need.
15665
15666 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15667 @subsection Sorting Lists
15668 @findex sort
15669
15670 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15671 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15672 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15673 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15674
15675 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15676 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15677 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15678 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15679 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15680 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15681 alphabetize a list.
15682
15683 @need 1250
15684 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15685
15686 @smallexample
15687 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15688 @end smallexample
15689
15690 @need 800
15691 @noindent
15692 produces this:
15693
15694 @smallexample
15695 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15696 @end smallexample
15697
15698 @noindent
15699 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15700 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15701 arguments.)
15702
15703 Sorting the list returned by the
15704 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15705 it uses the @code{<} function:
15706
15707 @ignore
15708 2006 Oct 29
15709 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15710 (progn
15711 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15712 (sort
15713 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15714 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15715 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15716 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15717 '<))
15718
15719 @end ignore
15720
15721 @smallexample
15722 @group
15723 (sort
15724 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15725 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15726 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15727 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15728 '<)
15729 @end group
15730 @end smallexample
15731
15732 @need 800
15733 @noindent
15734 which produces:
15735
15736 @smallexample
15737 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15738 @end smallexample
15739
15740 @noindent
15741 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15742 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15743 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15744
15745 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15746 @subsection Making a List of Files
15747
15748 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15749 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15750 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15751 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15752 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15753 recursive call.
15754
15755 @findex directory-files
15756 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15757 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15758 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15759 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15760 pattern within a single directory.
15761
15762 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15763 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15764 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15765 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15766 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15767 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15768
15769 @findex files-in-below-directory
15770 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15771 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15772 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15773 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15774 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15775 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15776
15777 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15778 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15779 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15780
15781 @smallexample
15782 @group
15783 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15784 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15785 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15786 @end group
15787 @end smallexample
15788
15789 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15790 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15791 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15792 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15793 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15794 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15795 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15796
15797 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15798 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15799 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15800 directory or a symbolic link.
15801
15802 @need 1000
15803 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15804 its attributes:
15805
15806 @smallexample
15807 @group
15808 ("abbrev.el"
15809 nil
15810 1
15811 1000
15812 100
15813 @end group
15814 @group
15815 (17733 259)
15816 (17491 28834)
15817 (17596 62124)
15818 13157
15819 "-rw-rw-r--"
15820 @end group
15821 @group
15822 nil
15823 2971624
15824 773)
15825 @end group
15826 @end smallexample
15827
15828 @need 1200
15829 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15830 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15831
15832 @smallexample
15833 @group
15834 ("mail"
15835 t
15836 @dots{}
15837 )
15838 @end group
15839 @end smallexample
15840
15841 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15842 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15843 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15844 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15845
15846 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15847 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15848 any directories below that directory.
15849
15850 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15851 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15852 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15853 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15854 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15855
15856 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15857 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15858 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15859 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15860 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15861 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15862 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15863 directory.
15864
15865 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15866 several tasks:
15867
15868 @itemize @bullet
15869 @item
15870 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15871 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15872
15873 @item
15874 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15875 directory; and if so,
15876
15877 @itemize @minus
15878 @item
15879 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15880 so skip it.
15881
15882 @item
15883 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15884 @end itemize
15885 @end itemize
15886
15887 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15888 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15889 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15890 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15891 pattern is `accumulate'
15892 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15893 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15894
15895 @ignore
15896 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15897 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15898
15899 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15900 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15901 @end ignore
15902
15903 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15904
15905 @need 800
15906 Here is the function:
15907
15908 @smallexample
15909 @group
15910 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15911 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15912 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15913 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15914 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15915 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15916 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15917 @end group
15918 @group
15919 (let (el-files-list
15920 (current-directory-list
15921 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15922 ;; while we are in the current directory
15923 (while current-directory-list
15924 @end group
15925 @group
15926 (cond
15927 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15928 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15929 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15930 (setq el-files-list
15931 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15932 @end group
15933 @group
15934 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15935 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15936 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15937 (if
15938 (equal "."
15939 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15940 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15941 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15942 ()
15943 @end group
15944 @group
15945 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15946 (setq el-files-list
15947 (append
15948 (files-in-below-directory
15949 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15950 el-files-list)))))
15951 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15952 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15953 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15954 ;; return the filenames
15955 el-files-list))
15956 @end group
15957 @end smallexample
15958
15959 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15960 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15961
15962 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15963 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15964
15965 @need 1250
15966 Thus, on my system,
15967
15968 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15969
15970 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15971 @smallexample
15972 @group
15973 (length
15974 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15975 @end group
15976 @end smallexample
15977
15978 @noindent
15979 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15980 @samp{.el} files.
15981
15982 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15983 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15984 like this:
15985
15986 @smallexample
15987 @group
15988 (sort
15989 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15990 'string-lessp)
15991 @end group
15992 @end smallexample
15993
15994 @ignore
15995 (defun test ()
15996 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15997 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15998 (sit-for 0)
15999 (sort
16000 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
16001 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
16002 '<)
16003 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
16004 @end ignore
16005
16006 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
16007 @subsection Counting function definitions
16008
16009 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
16010 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
16011 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
16012 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16013
16014 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16015 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16016 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16017 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16018 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16019 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16020 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16021
16022 @need 1200
16023 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16024 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16025 @vindex top-of-ranges
16026
16027 @smallexample
16028 @group
16029 (defvar top-of-ranges
16030 '(10 20 30 40 50
16031 60 70 80 90 100
16032 110 120 130 140 150
16033 160 170 180 190 200
16034 210 220 230 240 250
16035 260 270 280 290 300)
16036 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16037 @end group
16038 @end smallexample
16039
16040 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16041
16042 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16043 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16044 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16045 as arguments.
16046
16047 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16048 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16049 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16050 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16051 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16052 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16053 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16054 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16055 top-of-range values in turn.
16056
16057 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16058 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16059 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16060 small gear inside a big gear.
16061
16062 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16063 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16064 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16065 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16066 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16067 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16068 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16069
16070 @need 1250
16071 The inner loop looks like this:
16072
16073 @smallexample
16074 @group
16075 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16076 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16077 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16078 @end group
16079 @end smallexample
16080
16081 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16082 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16083 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16084
16085 @smallexample
16086 @group
16087 (while top-of-ranges
16088 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16089 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16090 @end group
16091 @end smallexample
16092
16093 @need 1200
16094 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16095
16096 @smallexample
16097 @group
16098 (while top-of-ranges
16099
16100 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16101 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16102 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16103 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16104
16105 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16106 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16107 @end group
16108 @end smallexample
16109
16110 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16111 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16112 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16113 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16114
16115 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16116 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16117 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16118 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16119 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16120 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16121 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16122 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16123 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16124 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16125 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16126 @findex nreverse
16127
16128 @need 800
16129 For example,
16130
16131 @smallexample
16132 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16133 @end smallexample
16134
16135 @need 800
16136 @noindent
16137 produces:
16138
16139 @smallexample
16140 (4 3 2 1)
16141 @end smallexample
16142
16143 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16144 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16145 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16146 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16147 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16148 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16149 as is.)
16150 @findex reverse
16151
16152 @need 1250
16153 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16154
16155 @smallexample
16156 @group
16157 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16158 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16159 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16160 (number-within-range 0)
16161 defuns-per-range-list)
16162 @end group
16163
16164 @group
16165 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16166 (while top-of-ranges
16167 @end group
16168
16169 @group
16170 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16171 (while (and
16172 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16173 (car sorted-lengths)
16174 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16175 @end group
16176
16177 @group
16178 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16179 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16180 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16181
16182 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16183 @end group
16184
16185 @group
16186 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16187 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16188 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16189 @end group
16190
16191 @group
16192 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16193 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16194 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16195 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16196 @end group
16197
16198 @group
16199 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16200 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16201 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16202 (cons
16203 (length sorted-lengths)
16204 defuns-per-range-list))
16205 @end group
16206
16207 @group
16208 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16209 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16210 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16211 @end group
16212 @end smallexample
16213
16214 @need 1200
16215 @noindent
16216 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16217 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16218
16219 @smallexample
16220 @group
16221 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16222 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16223 @end group
16224 @end smallexample
16225
16226 @need 800
16227 @noindent
16228 instead of like this:
16229
16230 @smallexample
16231 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16232 @end smallexample
16233
16234 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16235 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16236 range.
16237
16238 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16239 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16240 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16241 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16242 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16243 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16244
16245 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16246 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16247 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16248 the test will fail.
16249
16250 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16251 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16252 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16253 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16254 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16255 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16256 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16257 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16258 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16259 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16260 of the @code{and} expression.
16261
16262 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16263 This way, we avoid an error.
16264 @iftex
16265 @noindent
16266 (For information about @code{and}, see
16267 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16268 @end iftex
16269 @ifinfo
16270 @noindent
16271 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16272 information about @code{and}.)
16273 @end ifinfo
16274
16275 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16276 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16277 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16278 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16279 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16280
16281 @smallexample
16282 @group
16283 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16284 (setq top-of-ranges
16285 '(110 120 130 140 150
16286 160 170 180 190 200))
16287
16288 (setq sorted-lengths
16289 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16290
16291 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16292 @end group
16293 @end smallexample
16294
16295 @need 800
16296 @noindent
16297 The list returned looks like this:
16298
16299 @smallexample
16300 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16301 @end smallexample
16302
16303 @noindent
16304 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16305 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16306 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16307 of 200 or larger.
16308
16309 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16310 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16311 @chapter Readying a Graph
16312 @cindex Readying a graph
16313 @cindex Graph prototype
16314 @cindex Prototype graph
16315 @cindex Body of graph
16316
16317 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16318 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16319
16320 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16321 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16322 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16323 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16324 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16325 more.
16326
16327 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16328 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16329 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16330 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16331 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16332 the function to label the axes automatically.
16333
16334 @menu
16335 * Columns of a graph::
16336 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16337 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16338 * Printed Axes::
16339 * Line Graph Exercise::
16340 @end menu
16341
16342 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16343 @ifnottex
16344 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16345 @end ifnottex
16346
16347 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16348 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16349 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16350 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16351 symbol a user option.
16352
16353 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16354 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16355 label the graph, but only print its body.
16356
16357 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16358 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16359 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16360 @code{numbers-list}.
16361
16362 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16363 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16364
16365 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16366 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16367 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16368 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16369
16370 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16371 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16372 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16373 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16374 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16375 @findex apropos
16376
16377 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16378 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16379 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16380 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16381 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16382 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16383 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16384 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16385 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16386 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16387
16388 @need 1200
16389 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16390
16391 @smallexample
16392 @group
16393 insert-rectangle:
16394 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16395 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16396 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16397 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16398 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16399 and point is at the lower right corner.
16400 @end group
16401 @end smallexample
16402
16403 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16404
16405 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16406 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16407 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16408 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16409 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16410
16411 @smallexample
16412 @group
16413 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16414 second
16415 thirdnil
16416 @end group
16417 @end smallexample
16418
16419 @noindent
16420 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16421 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16422 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16423 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16424 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16425 column of strings.
16426
16427 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16428 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16429 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16430 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16431 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16432 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16433 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16434 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16435 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16436 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16437
16438 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16439 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16440 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16441 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16442 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16443 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16444
16445 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16446 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16447 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16448 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16449 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16450 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16451 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16452 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16453
16454 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16455 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16456 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16457 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16458 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16459 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16460 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16461 be difficult.
16462
16463 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16464 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16465 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16466 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16467 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16468 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16469 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16470 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16471
16472 @smallexample
16473 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16474 @end smallexample
16475
16476 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16477 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16478 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16479 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16480 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16481 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16482 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16483 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16484 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16485 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16486 example,
16487
16488 @smallexample
16489 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16490 @end smallexample
16491
16492 @noindent
16493 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16494 smallest of all its arguments.)
16495 @findex max
16496 @findex min
16497
16498 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16499 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16500 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16501
16502 @smallexample
16503 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16504 @end smallexample
16505
16506 @need 800
16507 @noindent
16508 produces the following error message;
16509
16510 @smallexample
16511 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16512 @end smallexample
16513
16514 @findex apply
16515 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16516 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16517 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16518 may be a list.
16519
16520 @need 1250
16521 For example,
16522
16523 @smallexample
16524 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16525 @end smallexample
16526
16527 @noindent
16528 returns 8.
16529
16530 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16531 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16532 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16533 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16534 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16535 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16536 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16537 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16538 it.)
16539
16540 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16541 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16542 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16543
16544 @smallexample
16545 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16546 @end smallexample
16547
16548 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16549 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16550 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16551 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16552 sorted or not.)
16553
16554 @need 800
16555 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16556
16557 @smallexample
16558 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16559 @end smallexample
16560
16561 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16562 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16563 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16564 function should return a list of strings for the
16565 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16566
16567 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16568 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16569 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16570 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16571 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16572 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16573
16574 @smallexample
16575 @group
16576 ;;; @r{First version.}
16577 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16578 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16579 (let ((insert-list nil)
16580 (number-of-top-blanks
16581 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16582 @end group
16583
16584 @group
16585 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16586 (while (> actual-height 0)
16587 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16588 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16589 @end group
16590
16591 @group
16592 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16593 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16594 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16595 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16596 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16597 @end group
16598
16599 @group
16600 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16601 insert-list))
16602 @end group
16603 @end smallexample
16604
16605 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16606 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16607
16608 @smallexample
16609 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16610 @end smallexample
16611
16612 @need 800
16613 @noindent
16614 returns
16615
16616 @smallexample
16617 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16618 @end smallexample
16619
16620 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16621 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16622 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16623 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16624 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16625 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16626 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16627 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16628 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16629 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16630 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16631 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16632 those variables separately.
16633
16634 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16635 lead us to the second version of the function:
16636
16637 @smallexample
16638 @group
16639 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16640 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16641 @end group
16642
16643 @group
16644 (defvar graph-blank " "
16645 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16646 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16647 as graph-symbol.")
16648 @end group
16649 @end smallexample
16650
16651 @noindent
16652 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16653 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16654
16655 @smallexample
16656 @group
16657 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16658 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16659 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16660
16661 @end group
16662 @group
16663 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16664 of the list.
16665 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16666 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16667 @end group
16668
16669 @group
16670 (let ((insert-list nil)
16671 (number-of-top-blanks
16672 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16673 @end group
16674
16675 @group
16676 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16677 (while (> actual-height 0)
16678 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16679 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16680 @end group
16681
16682 @group
16683 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16684 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16685 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16686 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16687 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16688
16689 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16690 insert-list))
16691 @end group
16692 @end smallexample
16693
16694 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16695 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16696 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16697 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16698 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16699 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16700 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16701 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16702 the list.
16703
16704 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16705 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16706 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16707 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16708 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16709 simple.
16710
16711 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16712 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16713 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16714
16715 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16716 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16717 @findex graph-body-print
16718
16719 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16720 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16721 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16722 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16723 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16724 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16725 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16726
16727 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16728 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16729
16730 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16731 version of this function:
16732
16733 @smallexample
16734 @group
16735 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16736 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16737 (let ((height @dots{}
16738 @dots{}))
16739 @end group
16740
16741 @group
16742 (while numbers-list
16743 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16744 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16745 @end group
16746 @end smallexample
16747
16748 @noindent
16749 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16750
16751 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16752 determine the height of the graph.
16753
16754 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16755 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16756 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16757 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16758
16759 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16760 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16761 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16762 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16763 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16764 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16765 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16766
16767 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16768 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16769 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16770 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16771 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16772 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16773 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16774 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16775 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16776
16777 @need 1250
16778 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16779
16780 @smallexample
16781 @group
16782 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16783 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16784 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16785
16786 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16787 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16788 from-position)
16789 @end group
16790
16791 @group
16792 (while numbers-list
16793 (setq from-position (point))
16794 (insert-rectangle
16795 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16796 (goto-char from-position)
16797 (forward-char symbol-width)
16798 @end group
16799 @group
16800 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16801 (sit-for 0)
16802 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16803 @end group
16804 @group
16805 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16806 (forward-line height)
16807 (insert "\n")
16808 ))
16809 @end group
16810 @end smallexample
16811
16812 @noindent
16813 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16814 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16815 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16816 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16817 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16818 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16819 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16820 function exits.
16821
16822 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16823
16824 @enumerate
16825 @item
16826 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16827 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16828 @iftex
16829 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16830 @end iftex
16831 @ifinfo
16832 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16833 @end ifinfo
16834 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16835
16836 @need 800
16837 @item
16838 Copy the following expression:
16839
16840 @smallexample
16841 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16842 @end smallexample
16843
16844 @item
16845 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16846 want the graph to start.
16847
16848 @item
16849 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16850
16851 @item
16852 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16853 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16854
16855 @item
16856 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16857 @end enumerate
16858
16859 @need 800
16860 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16861
16862 @smallexample
16863 @group
16864 *
16865 * **
16866 * ****
16867 *** ****
16868 ********* *
16869 ************
16870 *************
16871 @end group
16872 @end smallexample
16873
16874 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16875 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16876 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16877
16878 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16879 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16880 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16881 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16882 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16883 the graph.
16884
16885 @need 1250
16886 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16887
16888 @smallexample
16889 @group
16890 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16891 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16892 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16893 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16894 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16895 from-position)
16896 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16897 numbers-list
16898 height
16899 symbol-width)))
16900 @end group
16901 @end smallexample
16902
16903 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16904 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16905 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16906 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16907 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16908 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16909 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16910 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16911 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16912
16913 @smallexample
16914 @group
16915 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16916 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16917 "Print a bar graph.
16918 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16919 @end group
16920
16921 @group
16922 (when numbers-list
16923 (setq from-position (point))
16924 (insert-rectangle
16925 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16926 @end group
16927 @group
16928 (goto-char from-position)
16929 (forward-char symbol-width)
16930 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16931 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16932 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16933 @end group
16934 @end smallexample
16935
16936 @need 1250
16937 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16938
16939 @smallexample
16940 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16941 @end smallexample
16942
16943 @need 800
16944 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16945
16946 @smallexample
16947 @group
16948 *
16949 ** *
16950 **** *
16951 **** ***
16952 * *********
16953 ************
16954 *************
16955 @end group
16956 @end smallexample
16957
16958 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16959 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16960
16961 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16962 @section Need for Printed Axes
16963
16964 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16965 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16966 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16967
16968 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16969 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16970 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16971 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16972 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16973
16974 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16975 @section Exercise
16976
16977 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16978
16979 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16980 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16981 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16982 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16983 @cindex Initialization file
16984
16985 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16986 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16987 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16988 it to suit themselves.
16989
16990 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16991 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16992
16993 @menu
16994 * Default Configuration::
16995 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16996 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16997 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16998 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16999 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
17000 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
17001 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
17002 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
17003 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
17004 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
17005 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
17006 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
17007 * Miscellaneous::
17008 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
17009 @end menu
17010
17011 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
17012 @ifnottex
17013 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
17014 @end ifnottex
17015
17016 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
17017 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17018 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17019 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17020 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17021 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17022 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17023 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17024 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17025 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17026
17027 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17028 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17029
17030 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17031 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17032 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17033
17034 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17035 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17036 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17037 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17038 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17039 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17040 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17041 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17042
17043 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17044 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
17045 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17046 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17047
17048 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17049 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17050 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17051
17052 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17053 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17054 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17055 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17056 Manual}.
17057
17058 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17059 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17060
17061 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17062 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17063 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17064 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17065 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17066 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17067 everyone.
17068
17069 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17070 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17071 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17072 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17073 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17074 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17075 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17076 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17077
17078 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17079 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17080 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17081 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17082 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17083
17084 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17085 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17086 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17087 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17088 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17089 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17090 Simple Extension}.)
17091
17092 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17093 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17094 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17095
17096 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17097 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17098 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17099
17100 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17101 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17102 initialization file.
17103
17104 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17105 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17106 @findex defcustom
17107
17108 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17109 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
17110 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17111 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17112 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17113 file.)
17114
17115 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17116 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17117 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17118 job.
17119
17120 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17121 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17122 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17123 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17124 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17125 documentation.
17126
17127 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17128 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17129 arguments are optional.)
17130
17131 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17132 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17133
17134 @need 1250
17135 For example, the customizable user option variable
17136 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17137
17138 @smallexample
17139 @group
17140 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17141 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17142 :type 'hook
17143 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17144 :group 'data)
17145 @end group
17146 @end smallexample
17147
17148 @noindent
17149 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17150 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17151
17152 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17153 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17154 Customization buffer.
17155
17156 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17157 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17158 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17159 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17160 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17161 user.
17162
17163 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17164 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17165 find it.
17166
17167 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17168 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17169 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17170
17171 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17172
17173 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17174 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17175
17176 @need 800
17177 Using the customization command, you can type:
17178
17179 @smallexample
17180 M-x customize
17181 @end smallexample
17182
17183 @noindent
17184 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17185 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17186 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17187 values. After you click on the button to
17188
17189 @smallexample
17190 Save for Future Sessions
17191 @end smallexample
17192
17193 @noindent
17194 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17195 It will look like this:
17196
17197 @smallexample
17198 @group
17199 (custom-set-variables
17200 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17201 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17202 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17203 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17204 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17205 @end group
17206 @end smallexample
17207
17208 @noindent
17209 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17210 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17211 It comes on automatically.)
17212
17213 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17214 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17215 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17216 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17217 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17218 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17219
17220 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17221 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17222 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17223 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17224 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17225
17226 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17227 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17228 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17229
17230 @need 800
17231 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17232 message that says
17233
17234 @smallexample
17235 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17236 @end smallexample
17237
17238 @need 800
17239 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17240
17241 @smallexample
17242 Save for Future Sessions
17243 @end smallexample
17244
17245 @noindent
17246 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17247 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17248 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17249 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17250 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17251 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17252
17253 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17254 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17255 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17256
17257 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17258 expressions myself.
17259
17260 @findex defsubst
17261 @findex defconst
17262 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17263 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17264 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17265 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17266 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17267 variable; but please do not.)
17268
17269 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17270 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17271 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17272
17273 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17274 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17275 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17276
17277 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17278 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17279 definitions.
17280
17281 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17282 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17283
17284 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17285 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17286
17287 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17288 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17289 not.
17290
17291 @need 1200
17292 @smallexample
17293 @group
17294 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17295 ; Robert J. Chassell
17296 ; 26 September 1985
17297 @end group
17298 @end smallexample
17299
17300 @noindent
17301 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17302 adding to it ever since.
17303
17304 @smallexample
17305 @group
17306 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17307 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17308 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17309 ; three semicolons.
17310 @end group
17311 @end smallexample
17312
17313 @noindent
17314 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17315 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17316 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17317 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17318 more about comments.)
17319
17320 @smallexample
17321 @group
17322 ;;;; The Help Key
17323 ; Control-h is the help key;
17324 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17325 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17326 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17327 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17328 @end group
17329 @end smallexample
17330
17331 @noindent
17332 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17333
17334 @smallexample
17335 @group
17336 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17337 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17338 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17339 ; control-h m.
17340 @end group
17341 @end smallexample
17342
17343 @noindent
17344 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17345 all you need to know.
17346
17347 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17348 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17349 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17350 remember to look here to remind myself.
17351
17352 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17353 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17354
17355 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17356 Auto Fill mode.
17357
17358 @smallexample
17359 @group
17360 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17361 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17362 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17363 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17364 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17365 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17366 @end group
17367 @end smallexample
17368
17369 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17370 besides remind a forgetful human!
17371
17372 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17373 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17374 other mode, such as C mode.
17375
17376 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17377 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17378 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17379 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17380 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17381 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17382 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17383 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17384 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17385 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17386 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17387 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17388
17389 @ifinfo
17390 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17391 Emacs Manual}.
17392
17393 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17394 Manual}.
17395 @end ifinfo
17396 @iftex
17397 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17398 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17399 @end iftex
17400
17401 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17402
17403 @need 800
17404 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17405
17406 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17407 @smallexample
17408 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17409 @end smallexample
17410
17411 @noindent
17412 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17413
17414 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17415 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17416 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17417 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17418 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17419 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17420 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17421 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17422 anywhere else in Emacs.
17423
17424 @need 800
17425 Here is the next line:
17426
17427 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17428 @findex add-hook
17429 @smallexample
17430 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17431 @end smallexample
17432
17433 @noindent
17434 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17435 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17436
17437 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17438 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17439
17440 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17441 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17442 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17443
17444 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17445 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17446 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17447
17448 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17449 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17450 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17451 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17452 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17453 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17454
17455 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17456 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17457 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17458 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17459
17460 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17461 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17462 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17463 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17464 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17465
17466 @need 1250
17467 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17468 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17469
17470 @smallexample
17471 (setq colon-double-space t)
17472 @end smallexample
17473
17474 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17475 @section Mail Aliases
17476
17477 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17478 reminders.
17479
17480 @smallexample
17481 @group
17482 ;;; Mail mode
17483 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17484 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17485 ; type `M-x rmail'
17486 (setq mail-aliases t)
17487 @end group
17488 @end smallexample
17489
17490 @cindex Mail aliases
17491 @noindent
17492 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17493 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17494 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17495
17496 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17497 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17498 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17499
17500 @smallexample
17501 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17502 @end smallexample
17503
17504 @noindent
17505 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17506 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17507
17508 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17509 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17510 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17511 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17512
17513 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17514 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17515 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17516 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17517 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17518
17519 @need 1250
17520 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17521
17522 @smallexample
17523 @group
17524 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17525 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17526 @end group
17527 @end smallexample
17528
17529 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17530 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17531 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17532 values for the variable.
17533
17534 @ifinfo
17535 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17536
17537 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17538 Manual}.
17539 @end ifinfo
17540 @iftex
17541 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17542 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17543 @end iftex
17544
17545 @need 1700
17546 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17547 @section Some Keybindings
17548
17549 Now for some personal keybindings:
17550
17551 @smallexample
17552 @group
17553 ;;; Compare windows
17554 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17555 @end group
17556 @end smallexample
17557
17558 @findex compare-windows
17559 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17560 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17561 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17562 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17563
17564 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17565
17566 @cindex Setting a key globally
17567 @cindex Global set key
17568 @cindex Key setting globally
17569 @findex global-set-key
17570 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17571 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17572 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17573 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17574 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17575 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17576 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17577 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17578 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17579 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17580 details.)
17581
17582 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17583 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17584 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17585
17586 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17587 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17588 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17589 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17590 adapt what is there.
17591
17592 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17593 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17594 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17595 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17596 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17597 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17598 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17599 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17600 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17601
17602 @need 1250
17603 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17604
17605 @smallexample
17606 @group
17607 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17608 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17609 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17610 @end group
17611 @end smallexample
17612
17613 @findex occur
17614 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17615 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17616 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17617 to jump to occurrences.
17618
17619 @findex global-unset-key
17620 @cindex Unbinding key
17621 @cindex Key unbinding
17622 @need 1250
17623 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17624 work:
17625
17626 @smallexample
17627 @group
17628 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17629 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17630 @end group
17631 @end smallexample
17632
17633 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17634 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17635 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17636 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17637 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17638
17639 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17640 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17641 @need 1250
17642 The following rebinds an existing key:
17643
17644 @smallexample
17645 @group
17646 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17647 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17648 @end group
17649 @end smallexample
17650
17651 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17652 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17653 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17654 almost always want to do something in that
17655 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17656 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17657 but moves point into that window.
17658
17659 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17660 @section Keymaps
17661 @cindex Keymaps
17662 @cindex Rebinding keys
17663
17664 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17665 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17666 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17667 @code{current-global-map}.
17668
17669 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17670 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17671 all buffers.
17672
17673 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17674 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17675 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17676
17677 @smallexample
17678 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17679 @end smallexample
17680
17681 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17682 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17683 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17684 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17685 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17686
17687 @smallexample
17688 @group
17689 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17690 @end group
17691 @end smallexample
17692
17693 @noindent
17694 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17695 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17696 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17697 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17698 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17699 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17700 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17701
17702 @need 1250
17703 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17704
17705 @smallexample
17706 @group
17707 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17708 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17709 (interactive)
17710 (beginning-of-line)
17711 (insert "@@group\n"))
17712 @end group
17713 @end smallexample
17714
17715 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17716 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17717 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17718
17719 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17720 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17721 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17722
17723 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17724 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17725 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17726
17727 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17728 @section Loading Files
17729 @cindex Loading files
17730 @c findex load
17731
17732 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17733 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17734 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17735 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17736
17737 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17738 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17739 For example:
17740
17741 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17742
17743 @smallexample
17744 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17745 @end smallexample
17746
17747 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17748 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17749 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17750 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17751 1989.
17752
17753 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17754 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17755 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17756 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17757 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17758 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17759 window.
17760
17761 @need 1250
17762 To replace the key binding for the default
17763 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17764 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17765
17766 @smallexample
17767 @group
17768 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17769 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17770 @end group
17771 @end smallexample
17772
17773 @vindex load-path
17774 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17775 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17776 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17777 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17778 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17779 when Emacs is built.)
17780
17781 @need 1250
17782 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17783 existing load path:
17784
17785 @smallexample
17786 @group
17787 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17788 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17789 @end group
17790 @end smallexample
17791
17792 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17793 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17794
17795 @findex load-library
17796 @smallexample
17797 @group
17798 (defun load-library (library)
17799 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17800 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17801 (interactive
17802 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17803 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17804 load-path
17805 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17806 (load library))
17807 @end group
17808 @end smallexample
17809
17810 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17811 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17812 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17813
17814 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17815 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17816 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17817 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17818
17819 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17820 @section Autoloading
17821 @findex autoload
17822
17823 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17824 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17825 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17826 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17827
17828 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17829 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17830
17831 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17832 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17833 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17834
17835 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17836 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17837 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17838 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17839 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17840 @file{.emacs} file.
17841
17842 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17843 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17844 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17845 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17846 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17847 dumping.)
17848
17849 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17850 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17851 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17852 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17853 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17854 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17855 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17856 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17857 function (the default is a function).
17858
17859 @need 800
17860 Here is a typical example:
17861
17862 @smallexample
17863 @group
17864 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17865 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17866 @end group
17867 @end smallexample
17868
17869 @noindent
17870 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17871 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17872
17873 @noindent
17874 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17875 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17876 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17877 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17878 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17879 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17880 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17881 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17882 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17883 documentation is not available.)
17884
17885 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17886 Manual}, for more information.
17887
17888 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17889 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17890 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17891 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17892
17893 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17894 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17895 to read.
17896
17897 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17898 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17899 @file{.emacs} file.
17900
17901 @need 1250
17902 Here is the definition:
17903
17904 @smallexample
17905 @group
17906 ;;; Line to top of window;
17907 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17908 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17909 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17910 (interactive)
17911 (recenter 0))
17912 @end group
17913 @end smallexample
17914
17915 @need 1250
17916 Now for the keybinding.
17917
17918 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17919 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17920 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17921 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17922
17923 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17924 this:
17925
17926 @smallexample
17927 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17928 @end smallexample
17929
17930 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17931 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17932
17933 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17934 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17935 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17936 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17937 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17938 the following conditional:
17939
17940 @smallexample
17941 @group
17942 (cond
17943 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17944 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17945 ( @dots{} ))
17946 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17947 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17948 ( @dots{} )))
17949 @end group
17950 @end smallexample
17951
17952 For example, in contrast to version 20, more recent versions blink
17953 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17954 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17955 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17956 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17957
17958 @smallexample
17959 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17960
17961 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17962
17963 emacs -Q - D
17964 @end smallexample
17965 }:
17966
17967 @smallexample
17968 @group
17969 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17970 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17971 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17972 ;; at the end of the buffer
17973 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17974 @end group
17975 @group
17976 ;; Turn on image viewing
17977 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17978 @end group
17979 @group
17980 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17981 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17982 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17983 @end group
17984 @group
17985 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17986 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17987 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17988 @end group
17989 @group
17990 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17991 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17992 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17993 (tooltip-mode nil)
17994 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17995 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17996 )
17997 @end group
17998 @end smallexample
17999
18000 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
18001 @section X11 Colors
18002
18003 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
18004 system.
18005
18006 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
18007
18008 @need 1250
18009 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
18010 file that set values:
18011
18012 @smallexample
18013 @group
18014 ;; Set cursor color
18015 (set-cursor-color "white")
18016
18017 ;; Set mouse color
18018 (set-mouse-color "white")
18019
18020 ;; Set foreground and background
18021 (set-foreground-color "white")
18022 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18023 @end group
18024
18025 @group
18026 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18027 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18028 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18029 @end group
18030
18031 @group
18032 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18033 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18034 @end group
18035
18036 @group
18037 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18038 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18039 @end group
18040
18041 @group
18042 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18043 (setq calendar-load-hook
18044 '(lambda ()
18045 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18046 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18047 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18048 @end group
18049 @end smallexample
18050
18051 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18052 the screen flicker.
18053
18054 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18055 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18056 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18057 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18058
18059 @smallexample
18060 @group
18061 Emacs*foreground: white
18062 Emacs*background: darkblue
18063 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18064 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18065 @end group
18066 @end smallexample
18067
18068 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18069 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18070 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18071 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18072
18073 @smallexample
18074 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18075 @end smallexample
18076
18077 @need 1700
18078 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18079 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18080
18081 @need 1250
18082 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18083 @sp 1
18084
18085 @itemize @minus
18086 @item
18087 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18088
18089 @smallexample
18090 @group
18091 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18092 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18093 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18094 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18095 @end group
18096
18097 @group
18098 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18099 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18100 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18101 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18102 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18103 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18104 @end group
18105 @group
18106 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18107 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18108 @end group
18109 @end smallexample
18110
18111 @item
18112 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18113 this:
18114
18115 @smallexample
18116 @group
18117 (setq-default
18118 default-frame-alist
18119 '((cursor-color . "white")
18120 (mouse-color . "white")
18121 (foreground-color . "white")
18122 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18123 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18124 (cursor-type . box)
18125 @end group
18126 @group
18127 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18128 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18129 (width . 80)
18130 (height . 58)
18131 (font .
18132 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18133 ))
18134 @end group
18135 @end smallexample
18136
18137 @item
18138 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18139 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18140 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18141 problem recently.)
18142
18143 @smallexample
18144 @group
18145 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18146 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18147
18148 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18149 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18150 @end group
18151 @end smallexample
18152
18153 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18154
18155 @smallexample
18156 @group
18157 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18158 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18159 @end group
18160 @end smallexample
18161
18162 @noindent
18163 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18164
18165 @need 1250
18166 @item When using `grep'@*
18167 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18168 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18169 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18170 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18171
18172 @smallexample
18173 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18174 @end smallexample
18175
18176 @ignore
18177 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18178
18179 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18180
18181 smallexample
18182 (load "uncompress")
18183 end smallexample
18184
18185 @end ignore
18186
18187 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18188 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18189
18190 @smallexample
18191 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18192 @end smallexample
18193
18194 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18195
18196 @smallexample
18197 @group
18198 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18199 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18200 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18201 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18202 @end group
18203 @end smallexample
18204
18205 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18206
18207 @smallexample
18208 @group
18209 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18210 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18211 @end group
18212 @end smallexample
18213 @end itemize
18214
18215 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18216 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18217 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18218
18219 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18220 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18221 of the home row.
18222
18223 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18224 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18225 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18226 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18227 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18228
18229 @need 1250
18230 @noindent
18231 For a boot script:
18232
18233 @smallexample
18234 @group
18235 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18236 @exdent or
18237 install-keymap emacs2
18238 @end group
18239 @end smallexample
18240
18241 @need 1250
18242 @noindent
18243 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18244 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18245
18246 @smallexample
18247 @group
18248 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18249 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18250 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18251
18252 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18253 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18254 @end group
18255 @end smallexample
18256
18257 @need 1250
18258 @noindent
18259 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18260 key to a @key{META} key:
18261
18262 @smallexample
18263 @group
18264 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18265 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18266 @end group
18267 @end smallexample
18268
18269 @need 1700
18270 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18271 @section A Modified Mode Line
18272 @vindex mode-line-format
18273 @cindex Mode line format
18274
18275 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18276
18277 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18278 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18279
18280 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18281
18282 @smallexample
18283 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18284 @end smallexample
18285
18286 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18287 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18288 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18289
18290 @need 1200
18291 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18292
18293 @smallexample
18294 @group
18295 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18296 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18297 (setq-default mode-line-format
18298 (quote
18299 (#("-" 0 1
18300 (help-echo
18301 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18302 mode-line-mule-info
18303 mode-line-modified
18304 mode-line-frame-identification
18305 " "
18306 @end group
18307 @group
18308 mode-line-buffer-identification
18309 " "
18310 (:eval (substring
18311 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18312 ":"
18313 default-directory
18314 #(" " 0 1
18315 (help-echo
18316 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18317 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18318 global-mode-string
18319 @end group
18320 @group
18321 #(" %[(" 0 6
18322 (help-echo
18323 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18324 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18325 mode-line-process
18326 minor-mode-alist
18327 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18328 ")%] "
18329 (-3 . "%P")
18330 ;; "-%-"
18331 )))
18332 @end group
18333 @end smallexample
18334
18335 @noindent
18336 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18337 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18338 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18339 it.
18340
18341 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18342 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18343 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18344 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18345 have not discussed.
18346
18347 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18348 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18349 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18350 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18351 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18352 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18353 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18354 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18355
18356 @need 1000
18357 The new string format has a special syntax:
18358
18359 @smallexample
18360 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18361 @end smallexample
18362
18363 @noindent
18364 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18365 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18366 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18367 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18368 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18369 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18370 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18371 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18372 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18373 string format can be repeated.
18374
18375 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18376 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18377 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18378
18379 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18380 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18381 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18382 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18383
18384 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18385 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18386 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18387 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18388 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18389 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18390 window.)
18391
18392 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18393 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18394 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18395 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18396 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18397 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18398
18399 @need 1250
18400 This is the expression:
18401
18402 @smallexample
18403 @group
18404 (:eval (substring
18405 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18406 @end group
18407 @end smallexample
18408
18409 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18410 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18411 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18412 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18413 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18414 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18415 out the line.
18416
18417 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18418 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18419 keys than a default Emacs.
18420
18421 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18422 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18423
18424 @smallexample
18425 emacs -q
18426 @end smallexample
18427
18428 @noindent
18429 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18430 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18431 more.
18432
18433 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18434 @chapter Debugging
18435 @cindex debugging
18436
18437 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18438 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18439 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18440
18441 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18442 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18443 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18444
18445 @menu
18446 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18447 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18448 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18449 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18450 * Debugging Exercises::
18451 @end menu
18452
18453 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18454 @section @code{debug}
18455 @findex debug
18456
18457 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18458 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18459 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18460 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18461 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18462
18463 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18464 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18465
18466 @findex triangle-bugged
18467 @smallexample
18468 @group
18469 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18470 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18471 (let ((total 0))
18472 (while (> number 0)
18473 (setq total (+ total number))
18474 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18475 total))
18476 @end group
18477 @end smallexample
18478
18479 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18480 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18481 echo area.
18482
18483 @need 1250
18484 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18485 argument of 4:
18486
18487 @smallexample
18488 (triangle-bugged 4)
18489 @end smallexample
18490
18491 @noindent
18492 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18493 buffer that says:
18494
18495 @noindent
18496 @smallexample
18497 @group
18498 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18499 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18500 (1= number)
18501 (setq number (1= number))
18502 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18503 (setq number (1= number)))
18504 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18505 (setq number ...)) total)
18506 triangle-bugged(4)
18507 @end group
18508 @group
18509 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18510 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18511 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18512 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18513 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18514 @end group
18515 @end smallexample
18516
18517 @noindent
18518 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18519 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18520 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18521
18522 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18523 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18524 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18525
18526 @ignore
18527 @need 800
18528 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18529
18530 @smallexample
18531 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18532 @end smallexample
18533
18534 @noindent
18535 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18536 version 21.
18537 @end ignore
18538
18539 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18540 You can read the complete backtrace.
18541
18542 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18543 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18544 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18545
18546 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18547 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18548 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18549 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18550 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18551
18552 @need 1250
18553 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18554
18555 @smallexample
18556 (setq number (1= number))
18557 @end smallexample
18558
18559 @noindent
18560 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18561 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18562 top:
18563
18564 @smallexample
18565 (1= number)
18566 @end smallexample
18567
18568 @need 1250
18569 @noindent
18570 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18571
18572 @smallexample
18573 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18574 @end smallexample
18575
18576 @noindent
18577 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18578 then run your test again.
18579
18580 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18581 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18582 @findex debug-on-entry
18583
18584 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18585 function has an error.
18586
18587 @ignore
18588 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18589 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18590 manually.
18591 @end ignore
18592
18593 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18594 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18595 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18596
18597 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18598 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18599
18600 @need 1250
18601 @noindent
18602 Type:
18603
18604 @smallexample
18605 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18606 @end smallexample
18607
18608 @need 1250
18609 @noindent
18610 Now, evaluate the following:
18611
18612 @smallexample
18613 (triangle-bugged 5)
18614 @end smallexample
18615
18616 @noindent
18617 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18618 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18619 function:
18620
18621 @smallexample
18622 @group
18623 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18624 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18625 * triangle-bugged(5)
18626 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18627 @end group
18628 @group
18629 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18630 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18631 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18632 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18633 @end group
18634 @end smallexample
18635
18636 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18637 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18638 like this:
18639
18640 @smallexample
18641 @group
18642 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18643 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18644 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18645 (setq number ...)) total)
18646 * triangle-bugged(5)
18647 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18648 @end group
18649 @group
18650 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18651 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18652 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18653 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18654 @end group
18655 @end smallexample
18656
18657 @noindent
18658 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18659 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18660 definition.
18661
18662 @need 1750
18663 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18664
18665 @smallexample
18666 @group
18667 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18668 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18669 * (setq number (1= number))
18670 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18671 (setq number (1= number)))
18672 @group
18673 @end group
18674 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18675 (setq number ...)) total)
18676 * triangle-bugged(5)
18677 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18678 @group
18679 @end group
18680 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18681 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18682 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18683 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18684 @end group
18685 @end smallexample
18686
18687 @need 1500
18688 @noindent
18689 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18690 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18691 like this:
18692
18693 @smallexample
18694 @group
18695 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18696 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18697 * (1= number)
18698 @dots{}
18699 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18700 @end group
18701 @end smallexample
18702
18703 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18704
18705 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18706 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18707
18708 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18709 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18710 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18711
18712 @smallexample
18713 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18714 @end smallexample
18715
18716 @noindent
18717 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18718
18719 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18720 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18721
18722 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18723 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18724
18725 @findex debug-on-quit
18726 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18727 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18728 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18729
18730 @need 1500
18731 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18732 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18733 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18734
18735 @smallexample
18736 @group
18737 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18738 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18739 (let ((total 0))
18740 (while (> number 0)
18741 (setq total (+ total number))
18742 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18743 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18744 total))
18745 @end group
18746 @end smallexample
18747
18748 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18749 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18750
18751 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18752 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18753 @cindex Source level debugger
18754 @findex edebug
18755
18756 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18757 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18758 shows which line you are currently executing.
18759
18760 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18761 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18762
18763 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18764 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18765
18766 @need 1250
18767 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18768 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18769 for a review of it.
18770
18771 @smallexample
18772 @group
18773 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18774 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18775 Uses recursion."
18776 (if (= number 1)
18777 1
18778 (+ number
18779 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18780 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18781 @end group
18782 @end smallexample
18783
18784 @noindent
18785 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18786 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18787 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18788 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18789 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18790 Interaction mode.)
18791
18792 @need 1500
18793 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18794 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18795 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18796 and typing
18797
18798 @smallexample
18799 M-x edebug-defun RET
18800 @end smallexample
18801
18802 @noindent
18803 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18804 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18805
18806 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18807 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18808
18809 @smallexample
18810 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18811 @end smallexample
18812
18813 @noindent
18814 You will be jumped back to the source for
18815 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18816 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18817 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18818 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18819 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18820 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18821
18822 @smallexample
18823 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18824 @end smallexample
18825
18826 @noindent
18827 @iftex
18828 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18829 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18830 @end iftex
18831 @ifnottex
18832 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18833 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18834 @end ifnottex
18835
18836 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18837 be executed; the line will look like this:
18838
18839 @smallexample
18840 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18841 @end smallexample
18842
18843 @noindent
18844 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18845 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18846 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18847 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18848
18849 @smallexample
18850 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18851 @end smallexample
18852
18853 @noindent
18854 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18855 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18856 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18857
18858 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18859 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18860
18861 @smallexample
18862 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18863 @end smallexample
18864
18865 @need 1250
18866 @noindent
18867 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18868 that says:
18869
18870 @smallexample
18871 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18872 @end smallexample
18873
18874 @noindent
18875 This is the bug.
18876
18877 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18878
18879 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18880 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18881 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18882 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18883
18884 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18885 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18886 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18887 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18888 times a function is called, and more.
18889
18890 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18891 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18892
18893 @need 1500
18894 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18895 @section Debugging Exercises
18896
18897 @itemize @bullet
18898 @item
18899 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18900 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18901 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18902 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18903 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18904 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18905 Manual}.)
18906
18907 @item
18908 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18909 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18910 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18911 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18912 completes without problems.
18913
18914 @item
18915 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18916 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18917 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18918 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18919
18920 @item
18921 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18922 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18923 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18924
18925 @item
18926 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18927 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18928
18929 @item
18930 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18931 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18932 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18933
18934 @item
18935 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18936 stopping point.
18937 @end itemize
18938
18939 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18940 @chapter Conclusion
18941
18942 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18943 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18944 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18945 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18946
18947 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18948 teach yourself.
18949
18950 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18951 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18952 easy to use that we have not touched.
18953
18954 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18955 and in
18956 @ifnotinfo
18957 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18958 @end ifnotinfo
18959 @ifinfo
18960 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18961 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18962 @end ifinfo
18963
18964 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18965 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18966 figure out or find out what it does.
18967
18968 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18969 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18970 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18971 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18972 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18973 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18974
18975 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18976 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18977 the program that takes you to sources.
18978
18979 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18980 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18981 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18982 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18983 function, for example, looks complicated.
18984
18985 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18986 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18987 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18988 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18989 need to read all the functions. According to
18990 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18991 102 words and symbols.
18992
18993 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18994 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18995 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18996
18997 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18998 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18999 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
19000
19001 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
19002 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
19003 function. This gives you the function documentation.
19004
19005 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
19006 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
19007 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
19008 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
19009 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
19010
19011 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19012 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19013 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19014 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19015 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19016 (@code{find-tag}).
19017
19018 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19019 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19020 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19021
19022 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19023 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19024 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19025
19026 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19027 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19028 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19029 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19030 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19031
19032 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19033 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19034
19035 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19036 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19037 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19038 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19039 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19040 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19041 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19042 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19043 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19044
19045 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19046 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19047 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19048 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19049 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19050 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19051 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19052
19053 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19054 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19055 beginning.
19056
19057 @c ================ Appendix ================
19058
19059 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19060 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19061 @findex the-the
19062 @cindex Duplicated words function
19063 @cindex Words, duplicated
19064
19065 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19066 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19067 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19068 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19069
19070 @need 1250
19071 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19072 search for duplicates:
19073
19074 @smallexample
19075 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19076 @end smallexample
19077
19078 @noindent
19079 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19080 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19081 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19082 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19083 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19084 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19085 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19086 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19087 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19088
19089 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19090 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19091 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19092
19093 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19094 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19095 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19096 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19097
19098 @smallexample
19099 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19100 @end smallexample
19101
19102 @noindent
19103 Again, not useful.
19104
19105 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19106 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19107 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19108 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19109
19110 @smallexample
19111 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19112 @end smallexample
19113
19114 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19115 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19116
19117 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19118 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19119
19120 @smallexample
19121 @group
19122 (defun the-the ()
19123 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19124 (interactive)
19125 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19126 (push-mark)
19127 @end group
19128 @group
19129 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19130 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19131 (if (re-search-forward
19132 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19133 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19134 (message "End of buffer")))
19135 @end group
19136
19137 @group
19138 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19139 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19140 @end group
19141 @end smallexample
19142
19143 @sp 1
19144 Here is test text:
19145
19146 @smallexample
19147 @group
19148 one two two three four five
19149 five six seven
19150 @end group
19151 @end smallexample
19152
19153 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19154 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19155
19156 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19157 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19158 @cindex Kill ring handling
19159 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19160 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19161
19162 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19163 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19164 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19165
19166 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19167 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19168 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19169
19170 @menu
19171 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19172 * current-kill::
19173 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19174 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19175 * ring file::
19176 @end menu
19177
19178 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19179 @ifnottex
19180 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19181 @end ifnottex
19182
19183 @need 1250
19184 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19185 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19186 evaluate the following:
19187
19188 @smallexample
19189 @group
19190 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19191 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19192 @end group
19193 @end smallexample
19194
19195 @noindent
19196 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19197 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19198 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19199
19200 @noindent
19201 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19202 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19203 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19204 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19205 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19206 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19207 end you put point or mark.)
19208
19209 @need 1250
19210 @noindent
19211 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19212 fill the kill ring:
19213
19214 @smallexample
19215 @group
19216 first some text
19217 second piece of text
19218 third line
19219 fourth line of text
19220 fifth bit of text
19221 @end group
19222 @end smallexample
19223
19224 @need 1250
19225 @noindent
19226 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19227
19228 @smallexample
19229 kill-ring
19230 @end smallexample
19231
19232 @need 800
19233 @noindent
19234 It is:
19235
19236 @smallexample
19237 @group
19238 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19239 "third line" "second piece of text")
19240 @end group
19241 @end smallexample
19242
19243 @noindent
19244 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19245
19246 @need 1250
19247 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19248
19249 @smallexample
19250 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19251 @end smallexample
19252
19253 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19254 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19255 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19256 @findex current-kill
19257
19258 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19259 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19260 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19261 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19262 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19263 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19264 and @code{kill-region}.)
19265
19266 @menu
19267 * Code for current-kill::
19268 * Understanding current-kill::
19269 @end menu
19270
19271 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19272 @ifnottex
19273 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19274 @end ifnottex
19275
19276
19277 @need 1500
19278 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19279 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19280
19281 @smallexample
19282 @group
19283 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19284 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19285 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19286 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19287 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19288 @end group
19289 @group
19290 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19291 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19292 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19293 interprogram-paste-function
19294 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19295 @end group
19296 @group
19297 (if interprogram-paste
19298 (progn
19299 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19300 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19301 ;; selection, with identical text.
19302 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19303 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19304 interprogram-paste)
19305 @end group
19306 @group
19307 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19308 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19309 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19310 (length kill-ring))
19311 kill-ring)))
19312 (or do-not-move
19313 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19314 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19315 @end group
19316 @end smallexample
19317
19318 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19319 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19320 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19321 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19322 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19323
19324 @need 1500
19325 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19326 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19327
19328 @smallexample
19329 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19330 @end smallexample
19331
19332 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19333 @ifnottex
19334 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19335 @end ifnottex
19336
19337 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19338 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19339 skeletal form:
19340
19341 @smallexample
19342 @group
19343 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19344 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19345 (let @var{varlist}
19346 @var{body}@dots{})
19347 @end group
19348 @end smallexample
19349
19350 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19351 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19352
19353 @menu
19354 * Body of current-kill::
19355 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19356 * Determining the Element::
19357 @end menu
19358
19359 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19360 @ifnottex
19361 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19362 @end ifnottex
19363
19364 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19365 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19366
19367 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19368 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19369 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19370 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19371 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19372 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19373 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19374 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19375
19376 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19377 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19378
19379 @need 2000
19380 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19381 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19382 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19383 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19384
19385 @smallexample
19386 @group
19387 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19388 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19389 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19390 (length kill-ring))
19391 kill-ring)))
19392 (or do-not-move
19393 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19394 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19395 @end group
19396 @end smallexample
19397
19398 @noindent
19399 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19400 signals an error.
19401
19402 @need 1000
19403 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19404 with an @code{if}:
19405
19406 @findex zerop
19407 @findex error
19408 @smallexample
19409 @group
19410 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19411 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19412 ;; No else-part
19413 @end group
19414 @end smallexample
19415
19416 @noindent
19417 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19418 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19419 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19420 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19421
19422 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19423 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19424 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19425 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19426 is similar to the @code{message} function
19427 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19428 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19429 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19430 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19431 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19432
19433 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19434 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19435 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19436
19437 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19438 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19439 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19440 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19441
19442 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19443 @ifnottex
19444 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19445 @end ifnottex
19446
19447 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19448 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19449 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19450 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19451 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19452 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19453 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19454 exploration.
19455
19456 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19457 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19458 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19459 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19460 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19461 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19462 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19463
19464 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19465 @ifnottex
19466 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19467 @end ifnottex
19468
19469 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19470 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19471 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19472 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19473
19474 @need 800
19475 The code looks like this:
19476
19477 @smallexample
19478 @group
19479 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19480 (length kill-ring))
19481 kill-ring)))
19482 @end group
19483 @end smallexample
19484
19485 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19486 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19487 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19488 That is what the
19489 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19490 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19491 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19492 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19493 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19494
19495 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19496 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19497 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19498
19499 @need 800
19500 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19501
19502 @smallexample
19503 @group
19504 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19505
19506 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19507 @end group
19508 @end smallexample
19509
19510 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19511 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19512
19513 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19514 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19515
19516 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19517 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19518 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19519 sign as the second argument.
19520
19521 @need 800
19522 Thus,
19523
19524 @smallexample
19525 @group
19526 (mod 12 4)
19527 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19528 (mod 13 4)
19529 @result{} 1
19530 @end group
19531 @end smallexample
19532
19533 @need 1250
19534 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19535 That is fine.
19536
19537 @smallexample
19538 @group
19539 (mod 0 4)
19540 @result{} 0
19541 (mod 1 4)
19542 @result{} 1
19543 @end group
19544 @end smallexample
19545
19546 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19547 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19548 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19549 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19550
19551 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19552 @code{current-kill} function.
19553
19554 @need 1250
19555 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19556 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19557 following:
19558
19559 @smallexample
19560 @group
19561 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19562 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19563 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19564 '("fourth line of text"
19565 "third line"
19566 "second piece of text"
19567 "first some text"))
19568 @end group
19569 @end smallexample
19570
19571 @need 1250
19572 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19573 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19574 element.
19575
19576 @smallexample
19577 @group
19578 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19579 '("fourth line of text"
19580 "third line"
19581 "second piece of text"
19582 "first some text"))
19583 @end group
19584 @end smallexample
19585
19586 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19587 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19588 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19589 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19590 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19591 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19592 Local variables can only be accessed
19593 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19594 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19595
19596 @ignore
19597 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19598 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19599 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19600 @end ignore
19601
19602 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19603 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19604 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19605 @findex yank
19606
19607 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19608 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19609
19610 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19611 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19612 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19613 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19614
19615 @need 1250
19616 The code looks like this:
19617
19618 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19619 @smallexample
19620 @group
19621 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19622 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19623 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19624 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19625 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19626 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19627 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19628
19629 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19630 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19631 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19632
19633 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19634 @end group
19635 @group
19636 (interactive "*P")
19637 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19638 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19639 ;; for the following command.
19640 (setq this-command t)
19641 (push-mark (point))
19642 @end group
19643 @group
19644 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19645 ((listp arg) 0)
19646 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19647 (t (1- arg)))))
19648 (if (consp arg)
19649 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19650 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19651 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19652 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19653 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19654 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19655 @end group
19656 @group
19657 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19658 (if (eq this-command t)
19659 (setq this-command 'yank))
19660 nil)
19661 @end group
19662 @end smallexample
19663
19664 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19665 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19666 it.
19667
19668 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19669 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19670 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19671 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19672 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19673
19674 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19675 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19676 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19677
19678 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19679 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19680 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19681 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19682 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19683 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19684 function.)
19685
19686 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19687
19688 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19689 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19690 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19691 @findex yank-pop
19692
19693 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19694 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19695 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19696
19697 @c GNU Emacs 22
19698 @smallexample
19699 @group
19700 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19701 "@dots{}"
19702 (interactive "*p")
19703 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19704 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19705 @end group
19706 @group
19707 (setq this-command 'yank)
19708 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19709 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19710 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19711 @end group
19712 @group
19713 (if before
19714 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19715 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19716 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19717 @end group
19718 @group
19719 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19720 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19721 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19722 ;; if possible.
19723 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19724 @end group
19725 @group
19726 (if before
19727 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19728 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19729 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19730 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19731 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19732 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19733 (point)
19734 (current-buffer))))))
19735 nil)
19736 @end group
19737 @end smallexample
19738
19739 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19740 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19741 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19742 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19743 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19744 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19745
19746 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19747 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19748 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19749 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19750 replaced.
19751
19752 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19753 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19754 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19755 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19756
19757 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19758
19759 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19760 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19761 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19762 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19763
19764 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19765 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19766 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19767 because they were written earlier.
19768
19769 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19770 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19771
19772 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19773 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19774 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19775 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19776 body itself.
19777
19778 @menu
19779 * Labeled Example::
19780 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19781 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19782 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19783 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19784 @end menu
19785
19786 @node Labeled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19787 @ifnottex
19788 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19789 @end ifnottex
19790
19791 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19792 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19793 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19794 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19795
19796 @enumerate
19797 @item
19798 Set up code.
19799
19800 @item
19801 Print Y axis.
19802
19803 @item
19804 Print body of graph.
19805
19806 @item
19807 Print X axis.
19808 @end enumerate
19809
19810 @need 800
19811 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19812
19813 @smallexample
19814 @group
19815 10 -
19816 *
19817 * *
19818 * **
19819 * ***
19820 5 - * *******
19821 * *** *******
19822 *************
19823 ***************
19824 1 - ****************
19825 | | | |
19826 1 5 10 15
19827 @end group
19828 @end smallexample
19829
19830 @noindent
19831 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19832 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19833 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19834
19835 @smallexample
19836 @group
19837 5 - *
19838 * ** *
19839 *******
19840 ********** **
19841 1 - **************
19842 | ^ |
19843 Jan June Jan
19844 @end group
19845 @end smallexample
19846
19847 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19848 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19849 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19850 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19851 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19852
19853 @need 1200
19854 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19855 @code{print-graph} function:
19856
19857 @smallexample
19858 @group
19859 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19860 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19861 (let ((height @dots{}
19862 @dots{}))
19863 @end group
19864 @group
19865 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19866 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19867 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19868 @end group
19869 @end smallexample
19870
19871 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19872 in turn.
19873
19874 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labeled Example, Full Graph
19875 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19876 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19877 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19878
19879 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19880 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19881 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19882 contents of its documentation string.)
19883
19884 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19885 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19886 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19887 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19888 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19889 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19890 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19891
19892 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19893 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19894 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19895 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19896 previous chapter.
19897
19898 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19899 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19900 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19901
19902 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19903 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19904
19905 @smallexample
19906 @group
19907 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19908 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19909 @end group
19910 @end smallexample
19911
19912 @noindent
19913 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19914
19915 @need 2000
19916 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19917 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19918 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19919 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19920 @cindex Y axis printing
19921 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19922 @cindex Print vertical axis
19923
19924 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19925 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19926
19927 @smallexample
19928 @group
19929 10 -
19930
19931
19932
19933
19934 5 -
19935
19936
19937
19938 1 -
19939 @end group
19940 @end smallexample
19941
19942 @noindent
19943 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19944 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19945
19946 @menu
19947 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19948 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19949 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19950 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19951 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19952 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19953 @end menu
19954
19955 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19956 @ifnottex
19957 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19958 @end ifnottex
19959
19960 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19961 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19962 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19963 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19964 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19965 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19966 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19967 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19968 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19969 five.
19970
19971 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19972 @ifnottex
19973 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19974 @end ifnottex
19975
19976 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19977 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19978 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19979 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19980 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19981 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19982
19983 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19984 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19985 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19986 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19987 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19988 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19989 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19990 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19991 is required.
19992
19993 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19994 divided into several smaller problems.
19995
19996 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19997 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19998 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19999
20000 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
20001 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
20002 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
20003 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
20004 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
20005 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
20006 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
20007 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
20008
20009 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
20010 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
20011
20012 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20013 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20014 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20015 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20016 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20017 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20018 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20019 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20020 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20021
20022 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20023 expressions:
20024
20025 @smallexample
20026 @group
20027 (% 7 5)
20028
20029 (% 10 5)
20030 @end group
20031 @end smallexample
20032
20033 @noindent
20034 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20035
20036 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20037 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20038 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20039
20040 @smallexample
20041 @group
20042 (zerop (% 7 5))
20043 @result{} nil
20044
20045 (zerop (% 10 5))
20046 @result{} t
20047 @end group
20048 @end smallexample
20049
20050 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20051 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20052
20053 @smallexample
20054 (zerop (% height 5))
20055 @end smallexample
20056
20057 @noindent
20058 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20059 'max numbers-list)}.)
20060
20061 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20062 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20063 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20064 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20065 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20066 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20067 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20068 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20069 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20070 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20071
20072 @smallexample
20073 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20074 @end smallexample
20075
20076 @noindent
20077 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20078
20079 @smallexample
20080 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20081 @end smallexample
20082
20083 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20084 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20085 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20086 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20087 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20088
20089 @need 1250
20090 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20091 following:
20092
20093 @smallexample
20094 @group
20095 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20096 height
20097 ;; @r{else}
20098 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20099 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20100 @end group
20101 @end smallexample
20102
20103 @noindent
20104 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20105 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20106 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20107 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20108
20109 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20110 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20111 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20112 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20113
20114 @smallexample
20115 @group
20116 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20117 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20118 @end group
20119
20120 @group
20121 @dots{}
20122 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20123 (height-of-top-line
20124 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20125 height
20126 @end group
20127 @group
20128 ;; @r{else}
20129 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20130 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20131 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20132 @dots{}
20133 @end group
20134 @end smallexample
20135
20136 @noindent
20137 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20138 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20139 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20140 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20141 more about @code{let*}.)
20142
20143 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20144 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20145
20146 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20147 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20148 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20149 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20150 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20151 include a leading blank space before the number.
20152
20153 @findex number-to-string
20154 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20155 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20156 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20157 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20158 For example,
20159
20160 @smallexample
20161 @group
20162 (length (number-to-string 35))
20163 @result{} 2
20164
20165 (length (number-to-string 100))
20166 @result{} 3
20167 @end group
20168 @end smallexample
20169
20170 @noindent
20171 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20172 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20173
20174 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20175 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20176 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20177
20178 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20179 @smallexample
20180 @group
20181 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20182 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20183 @end group
20184 @end smallexample
20185
20186 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20187 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20188
20189 @smallexample
20190 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20191 @end smallexample
20192
20193 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20194 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20195 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20196
20197 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20198 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20199 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20200 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20201 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20202 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20203 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20204
20205 @smallexample
20206 @group
20207 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20208 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20209 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20210 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20211 the element for the largest number."
20212 @end group
20213 @group
20214 (let* ((leading-spaces
20215 (- full-Y-label-width
20216 (length
20217 (concat (number-to-string number)
20218 Y-axis-tic)))))
20219 @end group
20220 @group
20221 (concat
20222 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20223 (number-to-string number)
20224 Y-axis-tic)))
20225 @end group
20226 @end smallexample
20227
20228 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20229 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20230
20231 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20232 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20233 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20234
20235 @findex make-string
20236 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20237 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20238 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20239 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20240 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20241 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20242 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20243 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20244
20245 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20246 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20247 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20248
20249 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20250 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20251
20252 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20253 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20254 as the label for the vertical axis:
20255
20256 @findex Y-axis-column
20257 @smallexample
20258 @group
20259 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20260 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20261 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20262 (let (Y-axis)
20263 @group
20264 @end group
20265 (while (> height 1)
20266 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20267 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20268 (setq Y-axis
20269 (cons
20270 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20271 Y-axis))
20272 @group
20273 @end group
20274 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20275 (setq Y-axis
20276 (cons
20277 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20278 Y-axis)))
20279 (setq height (1- height)))
20280 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20281 (setq Y-axis
20282 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20283 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20284 @end group
20285 @end smallexample
20286
20287 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20288 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20289 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20290 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20291 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20292 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20293 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20294
20295 @need 2000
20296 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20297 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20298
20299 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20300 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20301
20302 @findex print-Y-axis
20303 @smallexample
20304 @group
20305 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20306 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20307 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20308 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20309 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20310 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20311 @end group
20312 @group
20313 (let ((start (point)))
20314 (insert-rectangle
20315 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20316 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20317 (goto-char start)
20318 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20319 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20320 @end group
20321 @end smallexample
20322
20323 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20324 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20325 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20326 the graph.
20327
20328 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20329
20330 @enumerate
20331 @item
20332 Install
20333
20334 @smallexample
20335 @group
20336 Y-axis-label-spacing
20337 Y-axis-tic
20338 Y-axis-element
20339 Y-axis-column
20340 print-Y-axis
20341 @end group
20342 @end smallexample
20343
20344 @item
20345 Copy the following expression:
20346
20347 @smallexample
20348 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20349 @end smallexample
20350
20351 @item
20352 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20353 want the axis labels to start.
20354
20355 @item
20356 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20357
20358 @item
20359 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20360 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20361
20362 @item
20363 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20364 @end enumerate
20365
20366 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20367 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20368 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20369 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20370
20371 @need 2000
20372 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20373 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20374 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20375 @cindex X axis printing
20376 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20377 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20378
20379 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20380 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20381
20382 @smallexample
20383 @group
20384 | | | |
20385 1 5 10 15
20386 @end group
20387 @end smallexample
20388
20389 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20390 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20391 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20392 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20393
20394 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20395 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20396 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20397
20398 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20399 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20400 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20401 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20402
20403 @menu
20404 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20405 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20406 @end menu
20407
20408 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20409 @ifnottex
20410 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20411 @end ifnottex
20412
20413 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20414 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20415 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20416 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20417 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20418
20419 This is a three step process:
20420
20421 @enumerate
20422 @item
20423 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20424
20425 @item
20426 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20427
20428 @item
20429 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20430 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20431 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20432 @end enumerate
20433
20434 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20435 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20436
20437 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20438 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20439
20440 @smallexample
20441 @group
20442 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20443 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20444 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20445 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20446 @end group
20447 @end smallexample
20448
20449 @noindent
20450 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20451 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20452 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20453 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20454 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20455 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20456 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20457
20458 @need 1200
20459 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20460
20461 @smallexample
20462 @group
20463 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20464 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20465 @end group
20466 @end smallexample
20467
20468 @need 1250
20469 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20470
20471 @smallexample
20472 | | | |
20473 @end smallexample
20474
20475 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20476 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20477
20478 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20479 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20480 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20481
20482 @need 1250
20483 The code looks like this:
20484
20485 @smallexample
20486 @group
20487 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20488 @dots{}
20489 (concat
20490 (make-string
20491 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20492 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20493 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20494 ? )
20495 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20496 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20497 @dots{}
20498 @end group
20499 @end smallexample
20500
20501 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20502 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20503 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20504
20505 @need 1250
20506 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20507 looks like this:
20508
20509 @smallexample
20510 @group
20511 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20512 @dots{}
20513 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20514 @dots{}
20515 @end group
20516 @end smallexample
20517
20518 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20519 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20520 axis:
20521
20522 @smallexample
20523 @group
20524 ;; X-length
20525 @dots{}
20526 (length numbers-list)
20527 @end group
20528
20529 @group
20530 ;; tic-width
20531 @dots{}
20532 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20533 @end group
20534
20535 @group
20536 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20537 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20538 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20539 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20540 @end group
20541 @end smallexample
20542
20543 @need 1250
20544 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20545
20546 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20547 @smallexample
20548 @group
20549 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20550 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20551 "Print ticks for X axis."
20552 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20553 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20554 @end group
20555 @group
20556 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20557 (insert (concat
20558 (make-string
20559 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20560 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20561 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20562 ? )
20563 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20564 @end group
20565 @group
20566 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20567 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20568 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20569 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20570 @end group
20571 @end smallexample
20572
20573 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20574
20575 @need 1250
20576 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20577
20578 @findex X-axis-element
20579 @smallexample
20580 @group
20581 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20582 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20583 (let ((leading-spaces
20584 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20585 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20586 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20587 (number-to-string number))))
20588 @end group
20589 @end smallexample
20590
20591 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20592 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20593
20594 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20595 @smallexample
20596 @group
20597 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20598 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20599 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20600 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20601 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20602 (insert "1")
20603 @end group
20604 @group
20605 (insert (concat
20606 (make-string
20607 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20608 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20609 ? )
20610 (number-to-string number)))
20611 @end group
20612 @group
20613 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20614 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20615 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20616 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20617 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20618 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20619 @end group
20620 @end smallexample
20621
20622 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20623 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20624 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20625
20626 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20627 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20628 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20629 separates the two lines.
20630
20631 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20632 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20633
20634 @findex print-X-axis
20635 @smallexample
20636 @group
20637 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20638 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20639 (let* ((leading-spaces
20640 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20641 @end group
20642 @group
20643 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20644 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20645 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20646 @end group
20647 @group
20648 (X-tic
20649 (concat
20650 (make-string
20651 @end group
20652 @group
20653 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20654 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20655 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20656 ? )
20657 @end group
20658 @group
20659 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20660 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20661 @end group
20662 @group
20663 (tic-number
20664 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20665 (/ X-length tic-width)
20666 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20667 @end group
20668 @group
20669 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20670 (insert "\n")
20671 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20672 @end group
20673 @end smallexample
20674
20675 @need 1250
20676 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20677
20678 @enumerate
20679 @item
20680 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20681 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20682 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20683
20684 @item
20685 Copy the following expression:
20686
20687 @smallexample
20688 @group
20689 (progn
20690 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20691 (symbol-width 1))
20692 (print-X-axis
20693 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20694 @end group
20695 @end smallexample
20696
20697 @item
20698 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20699 want the axis labels to start.
20700
20701 @item
20702 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20703
20704 @item
20705 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20706 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20707
20708 @item
20709 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20710 @end enumerate
20711
20712 @need 1250
20713 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20714 @sp 1
20715
20716 @smallexample
20717 @group
20718 | | | | |
20719 1 5 10 15 20
20720 @end group
20721 @end smallexample
20722
20723 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20724 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20725 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20726 @cindex Whole graph printing
20727 @cindex Graph, printing all
20728
20729 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20730
20731 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20732 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20733 Axes}), but with additions.
20734
20735 @need 1250
20736 Here is the outline:
20737
20738 @smallexample
20739 @group
20740 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20741 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20742 (let ((height @dots{}
20743 @dots{}))
20744 @end group
20745 @group
20746 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20747 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20748 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20749 @end group
20750 @end smallexample
20751
20752 @menu
20753 * The final version:: A few changes.
20754 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20755 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20756 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20757 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20758 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20759 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20760 @end menu
20761
20762 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20763 @ifnottex
20764 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20765 @end ifnottex
20766
20767 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20768 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20769 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20770 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20771 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20772
20773 @need 1500
20774 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20775 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20776 this:
20777
20778 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20779 @smallexample
20780 @group
20781 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20782 (defun Y-axis-column
20783 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20784 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20785 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20786 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20787 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20788 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20789 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20790 that each line is five units of the graph."
20791 @end group
20792 @group
20793 (let (Y-axis
20794 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20795 (while (> height 1)
20796 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20797 @end group
20798 @group
20799 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20800 (setq Y-axis
20801 (cons
20802 (Y-axis-element
20803 (* height number-per-line)
20804 width-of-label)
20805 Y-axis))
20806 @end group
20807 @group
20808 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20809 (setq Y-axis
20810 (cons
20811 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20812 Y-axis)))
20813 (setq height (1- height)))
20814 @end group
20815 @group
20816 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20817 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20818 (or vertical-step 1)
20819 width-of-label)
20820 Y-axis))
20821 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20822 @end group
20823 @end smallexample
20824
20825 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20826 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20827 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20828
20829 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20830 @smallexample
20831 @group
20832 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20833 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20834 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20835 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20836 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20837 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20838 @end group
20839 @group
20840 (let (from-position)
20841 (while numbers-list
20842 (setq from-position (point))
20843 (insert-rectangle
20844 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20845 (goto-char from-position)
20846 (forward-char symbol-width)
20847 @end group
20848 @group
20849 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20850 (sit-for 0)
20851 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20852 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20853 (forward-line height)
20854 (insert "\n")))
20855 @end group
20856 @end smallexample
20857
20858 @need 1250
20859 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20860
20861 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20862 @smallexample
20863 @group
20864 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20865 (defun print-graph
20866 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20867 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20868 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20869 @end group
20870
20871 @group
20872 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20873 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20874 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20875 each row is five units."
20876 @end group
20877 @group
20878 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20879 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20880 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20881 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20882 @end group
20883 @group
20884 (height-of-top-line
20885 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20886 height
20887 ;; @r{else}
20888 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20889 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20890 @end group
20891 @group
20892 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20893 (full-Y-label-width
20894 (length
20895 @end group
20896 @group
20897 (concat
20898 (number-to-string
20899 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20900 Y-axis-tic))))
20901 @end group
20902
20903 @group
20904 (print-Y-axis
20905 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20906 @end group
20907 @group
20908 (graph-body-print
20909 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20910 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20911 @end group
20912 @end smallexample
20913
20914 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20915 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20916
20917 @need 1250
20918 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20919
20920 @enumerate
20921 @item
20922 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20923 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20924 rest of the code.)
20925
20926 @item
20927 Copy the following expression:
20928
20929 @smallexample
20930 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20931 @end smallexample
20932
20933 @item
20934 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20935 want the axis labels to start.
20936
20937 @item
20938 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20939
20940 @item
20941 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20942 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20943
20944 @item
20945 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20946 @end enumerate
20947
20948 @need 1250
20949 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20950
20951 @smallexample
20952 @group
20953 10 -
20954
20955
20956 *
20957 ** *
20958 5 - **** *
20959 **** ***
20960 * *********
20961 ************
20962 1 - *************
20963
20964 | | | |
20965 1 5 10 15
20966 @end group
20967 @end smallexample
20968
20969 @need 1200
20970 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20971 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20972
20973 @smallexample
20974 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20975 @end smallexample
20976
20977 @need 1250
20978 @noindent
20979 The graph looks like this:
20980
20981 @smallexample
20982 @group
20983 20 -
20984
20985
20986 *
20987 ** *
20988 10 - **** *
20989 **** ***
20990 * *********
20991 ************
20992 2 - *************
20993
20994 | | | |
20995 1 5 10 15
20996 @end group
20997 @end smallexample
20998
20999 @noindent
21000 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
21001 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
21002 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
21003
21004 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
21005 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
21006
21007 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
21008 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
21009 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
21010 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
21011
21012 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21013 requisite code.
21014
21015 @need 1500
21016 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21017 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21018 following:
21019
21020 @smallexample
21021 @group
21022 (setq top-of-ranges
21023 '(10 20 30 40 50
21024 60 70 80 90 100
21025 110 120 130 140 150
21026 160 170 180 190 200
21027 210 220 230 240 250
21028 260 270 280 290 300)
21029 @end group
21030 @end smallexample
21031
21032 @noindent
21033 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21034
21035 @need 1500
21036 @noindent
21037 Evaluate the following:
21038
21039 @smallexample
21040 @group
21041 (setq list-for-graph
21042 (defuns-per-range
21043 (sort
21044 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21045 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21046 t ".+el$"))
21047 '<)
21048 top-of-ranges))
21049 @end group
21050 @end smallexample
21051
21052 @noindent
21053 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21054 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21055 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21056
21057 @smallexample
21058 @group
21059 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21060 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21061 @end group
21062 @end smallexample
21063
21064 @noindent
21065 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21066 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21067 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21068 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21069
21070 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21071 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21072
21073 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21074 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21075 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21076 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21077
21078 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21079 one-fiftieth its present value.
21080
21081 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21082 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21083
21084 @smallexample
21085 @group
21086 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21087 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21088 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21089 @end group
21090 @end smallexample
21091
21092 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21093 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21094 @cindex Anonymous function
21095 @findex lambda
21096
21097 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21098 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21099 include its whole body.
21100
21101 @need 1250
21102 @noindent
21103 Thus,
21104
21105 @smallexample
21106 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21107 @end smallexample
21108
21109 @noindent
21110 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21111 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21112
21113 @need 1200
21114 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21115 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21116 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21117 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21118
21119 @smallexample
21120 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21121 @end smallexample
21122
21123 @noindent
21124 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21125
21126 @need 1250
21127 @noindent
21128 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21129
21130 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21131 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21132 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21133 @c set print-postscript-figures
21134 @c lambda example diagram #1
21135 @ifnottex
21136 @smallexample
21137 @group
21138 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21139 \_______________/ ^
21140 | |
21141 function argument
21142 @end group
21143 @end smallexample
21144 @end ifnottex
21145 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21146 @sp 1
21147 @tex
21148 @center @image{lambda-1}
21149 %%%% old method of including an image
21150 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21151 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21152 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21153 @end tex
21154 @sp 1
21155 @end ifset
21156 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21157 @iftex
21158 @smallexample
21159 @group
21160 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21161 \_______________/ ^
21162 | |
21163 function argument
21164 @end group
21165 @end smallexample
21166 @end iftex
21167 @end ifclear
21168
21169 @noindent
21170 This expression returns 21.
21171
21172 @need 1250
21173 @noindent
21174 Similarly, we can write:
21175
21176 @c lambda example diagram #2
21177 @ifnottex
21178 @smallexample
21179 @group
21180 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21181 \____________________________/ ^
21182 | |
21183 anonymous function argument
21184 @end group
21185 @end smallexample
21186 @end ifnottex
21187 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21188 @sp 1
21189 @tex
21190 @center @image{lambda-2}
21191 %%%% old method of including an image
21192 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21193 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21194 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21195 @end tex
21196 @sp 1
21197 @end ifset
21198 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21199 @iftex
21200 @smallexample
21201 @group
21202 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21203 \____________________________/ ^
21204 | |
21205 anonymous function argument
21206 @end group
21207 @end smallexample
21208 @end iftex
21209 @end ifclear
21210
21211 @need 1250
21212 @noindent
21213 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21214
21215 @c lambda example diagram #3
21216 @ifnottex
21217 @smallexample
21218 @group
21219 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21220 \______________________/ \_/
21221 | |
21222 anonymous function argument
21223 @end group
21224 @end smallexample
21225 @end ifnottex
21226 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21227 @sp 1
21228 @tex
21229 @center @image{lambda-3}
21230 %%%% old method of including an image
21231 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21232 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21233 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21234 @end tex
21235 @sp 1
21236 @end ifset
21237 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21238 @iftex
21239 @smallexample
21240 @group
21241 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21242 \______________________/ \_/
21243 | |
21244 anonymous function argument
21245 @end group
21246 @end smallexample
21247 @end iftex
21248 @end ifclear
21249
21250 @noindent
21251 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21252 divides that number by 50.
21253
21254 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21255 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21256 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21257
21258 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21259 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21260 @findex mapcar
21261
21262 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21263 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21264 a sequence.
21265
21266 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21267 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21268 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21269 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21270 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21271 first of a list.
21272
21273 @need 1250
21274 @noindent
21275 For example,
21276
21277 @smallexample
21278 @group
21279 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21280 @result{} (3 5 7)
21281 @end group
21282 @end smallexample
21283
21284 @noindent
21285 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21286 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21287
21288 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21289 all the remaining.
21290 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21291 @code{apply}.)
21292
21293 @need 1250
21294 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21295 anonymous function:
21296
21297 @smallexample
21298 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21299 @end smallexample
21300
21301 @noindent
21302 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21303 @code{list-for-graph}.
21304
21305 @need 1250
21306 The whole expression looks like this:
21307
21308 @smallexample
21309 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21310 @end smallexample
21311
21312 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21313 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21314
21315 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21316 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21317 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21318
21319 @smallexample
21320 @group
21321 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21322 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21323 @end group
21324 @end smallexample
21325
21326 @need 1250
21327 The resulting list looks like this:
21328
21329 @smallexample
21330 @group
21331 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21332 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21333 @end group
21334 @end smallexample
21335
21336 @noindent
21337 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21338 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21339 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21340 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21341
21342 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21343 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21344 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21345 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21346
21347 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21348 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21349 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21350 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21351 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21352
21353 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21354 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21355 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21356 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21357 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21358 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21359 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21360 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21361
21362 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21363 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21364 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21365 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21366 a little thought.
21367
21368 @need 1250
21369 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21370
21371 @smallexample
21372 @group
21373 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21374 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21375 &optional horizontal-step)
21376 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21377 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21378 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21379 @end group
21380 @group
21381 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21382 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21383 (delete-char
21384 (- (1-
21385 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21386 (insert (concat
21387 (make-string
21388 @end group
21389 @group
21390 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21391 (- (* symbol-width
21392 X-axis-label-spacing)
21393 (1-
21394 (length
21395 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21396 2)
21397 ? )
21398 (number-to-string
21399 (* number horizontal-step))))
21400 @end group
21401 @group
21402 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21403 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21404 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21405 (insert (X-axis-element
21406 (* number horizontal-step)))
21407 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21408 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21409 @end group
21410 @end smallexample
21411
21412 @need 1500
21413 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21414 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21415 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21416 (the full text is too much to print).
21417
21418 @iftex
21419 @smallexample
21420 @group
21421 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21422 @dots{}
21423 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21424 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21425 @end group
21426 @end smallexample
21427
21428 @smallexample
21429 @group
21430 (defun print-graph
21431 (numbers-list
21432 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21433 @dots{}
21434 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21435 @end group
21436 @end smallexample
21437 @end iftex
21438
21439 @ifnottex
21440 @smallexample
21441 @group
21442 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21443 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21444 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21445 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21446 each column."
21447 @end group
21448 @group
21449 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21450 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21451 (let* ((leading-spaces
21452 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21453 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21454 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21455 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21456 @end group
21457 @group
21458 (X-tic
21459 (concat
21460 (make-string
21461 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21462 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21463 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21464 ? )
21465 @end group
21466 @group
21467 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21468 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21469 (tic-number
21470 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21471 (/ X-length tic-width)
21472 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21473 @end group
21474
21475 @group
21476 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21477 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21478 (insert "\n")
21479 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21480 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21481 @end group
21482 @end smallexample
21483
21484 @smallexample
21485 @group
21486 (defun print-graph
21487 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21488 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21489 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21490 @end group
21491
21492 @group
21493 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21494 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21495 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21496 each row is five units.
21497 @end group
21498
21499 @group
21500 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21501 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21502 each column."
21503 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21504 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21505 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21506 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21507 @end group
21508 @group
21509 (height-of-top-line
21510 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21511 height
21512 ;; @r{else}
21513 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21514 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21515 @end group
21516 @group
21517 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21518 (full-Y-label-width
21519 (length
21520 (concat
21521 (number-to-string
21522 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21523 Y-axis-tic))))
21524 @end group
21525 @group
21526 (print-Y-axis
21527 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21528 (graph-body-print
21529 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21530 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21531 @end group
21532 @end smallexample
21533 @end ifnottex
21534
21535 @c qqq
21536 @ignore
21537 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21538
21539 @need 1250
21540 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21541
21542 @smallexample
21543 @group
21544 (defvar top-of-ranges
21545 '(10 20 30 40 50
21546 60 70 80 90 100
21547 110 120 130 140 150
21548 160 170 180 190 200
21549 210 220 230 240 250)
21550 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21551 @end group
21552
21553 @group
21554 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21555 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21556 @end group
21557
21558 @group
21559 (defvar graph-blank " "
21560 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21561 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21562 as graph-symbol.")
21563 @end group
21564
21565 @group
21566 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21567 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21568 @end group
21569
21570 @group
21571 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21572 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21573 @end group
21574
21575 @group
21576 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21577 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21578 @end group
21579
21580 @group
21581 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21582 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21583 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21584 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21585 @end group
21586 @end smallexample
21587
21588 @smallexample
21589 @group
21590 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21591 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21592 (beginning-of-defun)
21593 (let ((count 0)
21594 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21595 @end group
21596
21597 @group
21598 (while
21599 (and (< (point) end)
21600 (re-search-forward
21601 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21602 end t))
21603 (setq count (1+ count)))
21604 count))
21605 @end group
21606 @end smallexample
21607
21608 @smallexample
21609 @group
21610 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21611 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21612 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21613 Each number is the number of words or
21614 symbols in one function definition."
21615 @end group
21616
21617 @group
21618 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21619 (save-excursion
21620 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21621 (lengths-list))
21622 (set-buffer buffer)
21623 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21624 (widen)
21625 (goto-char (point-min))
21626 @end group
21627
21628 @group
21629 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21630 (setq lengths-list
21631 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21632 (kill-buffer buffer)
21633 lengths-list)))
21634 @end group
21635 @end smallexample
21636
21637 @smallexample
21638 @group
21639 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21640 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21641 (let (lengths-list)
21642 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21643 (while list-of-files
21644 (setq lengths-list
21645 (append
21646 lengths-list
21647 @end group
21648 @group
21649 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21650 (lengths-list-file
21651 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21652 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21653 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21654 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21655 lengths-list))
21656 @end group
21657 @end smallexample
21658
21659 @smallexample
21660 @group
21661 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21662 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21663 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21664 (number-within-range 0)
21665 defuns-per-range-list)
21666 @end group
21667
21668 @group
21669 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21670 (while top-of-ranges
21671
21672 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21673 (while (and
21674 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21675 (car sorted-lengths)
21676 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21677
21678 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21679 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21680 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21681 @end group
21682
21683 @group
21684 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21685
21686 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21687 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21688 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21689
21690 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21691 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21692 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21693 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21694 @end group
21695
21696 @group
21697 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21698 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21699 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21700 (cons
21701 (length sorted-lengths)
21702 defuns-per-range-list))
21703
21704 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21705 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21706 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21707 @end group
21708 @end smallexample
21709
21710 @smallexample
21711 @group
21712 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21713 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21714 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21715 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21716 of the list.
21717 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21718 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21719 @end group
21720
21721 @group
21722 (let ((insert-list nil)
21723 (number-of-top-blanks
21724 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21725
21726 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21727 (while (> actual-height 0)
21728 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21729 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21730 @end group
21731
21732 @group
21733 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21734 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21735 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21736 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21737 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21738
21739 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21740 insert-list))
21741 @end group
21742 @end smallexample
21743
21744 @smallexample
21745 @group
21746 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21747 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21748 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21749 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21750 the element for the largest number."
21751 @end group
21752 @group
21753 (let* ((leading-spaces
21754 (- full-Y-label-width
21755 (length
21756 (concat (number-to-string number)
21757 Y-axis-tic)))))
21758 @end group
21759 @group
21760 (concat
21761 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21762 (number-to-string number)
21763 Y-axis-tic)))
21764 @end group
21765 @end smallexample
21766
21767 @smallexample
21768 @group
21769 (defun print-Y-axis
21770 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21771 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21772 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21773 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21774 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21775 @end group
21776 @group
21777 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21778 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21779 (let ((start (point)))
21780 (insert-rectangle
21781 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21782 @end group
21783 @group
21784 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21785 (goto-char start)
21786 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21787 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21788 @end group
21789 @end smallexample
21790
21791 @smallexample
21792 @group
21793 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21794 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21795 "Print ticks for X axis."
21796 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21797 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21798 @end group
21799 @group
21800 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21801 (insert (concat
21802 (make-string
21803 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21804 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21805 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21806 ? )
21807 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21808 @end group
21809 @group
21810 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21811 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21812 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21813 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21814 @end group
21815 @end smallexample
21816
21817 @smallexample
21818 @group
21819 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21820 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21821 (let ((leading-spaces
21822 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21823 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21824 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21825 (number-to-string number))))
21826 @end group
21827 @end smallexample
21828
21829 @smallexample
21830 @group
21831 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21832 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21833 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21834 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21835 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21836 @end group
21837 @group
21838 (let (from-position)
21839 (while numbers-list
21840 (setq from-position (point))
21841 (insert-rectangle
21842 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21843 (goto-char from-position)
21844 (forward-char symbol-width)
21845 @end group
21846 @group
21847 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21848 (sit-for 0)
21849 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21850 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21851 (forward-line height)
21852 (insert "\n")))
21853 @end group
21854 @end smallexample
21855
21856 @smallexample
21857 @group
21858 (defun Y-axis-column
21859 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21860 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21861 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21862 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21863 @end group
21864 @group
21865 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21866 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21867 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21868 that each line is five units of the graph."
21869 (let (Y-axis
21870 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21871 @end group
21872 @group
21873 (while (> height 1)
21874 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21875 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21876 (setq Y-axis
21877 (cons
21878 (Y-axis-element
21879 (* height number-per-line)
21880 width-of-label)
21881 Y-axis))
21882 @end group
21883 @group
21884 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21885 (setq Y-axis
21886 (cons
21887 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21888 Y-axis)))
21889 (setq height (1- height)))
21890 @end group
21891 @group
21892 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21893 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21894 (or vertical-step 1)
21895 width-of-label)
21896 Y-axis))
21897 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21898 @end group
21899 @end smallexample
21900
21901 @smallexample
21902 @group
21903 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21904 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21905 &optional horizontal-step)
21906 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21907 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21908 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21909 @end group
21910 @group
21911 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21912 ;; line up number
21913 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21914 (insert (concat
21915 (make-string
21916 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21917 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21918 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21919 2)
21920 ? )
21921 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21922 @end group
21923 @group
21924 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21925 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21926 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21927 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21928 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21929 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21930 @end group
21931 @end smallexample
21932
21933 @smallexample
21934 @group
21935 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21936 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21937 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21938 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21939 each column."
21940 @end group
21941 @group
21942 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21943 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21944 (let* ((leading-spaces
21945 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21946 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21947 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21948 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21949 @end group
21950 @group
21951 (X-tic
21952 (concat
21953 (make-string
21954 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21955 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21956 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21957 ? )
21958 @end group
21959 @group
21960 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21961 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21962 (tic-number
21963 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21964 (/ X-length tic-width)
21965 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21966 @end group
21967
21968 @group
21969 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21970 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21971 (insert "\n")
21972 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21973 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21974 @end group
21975 @end smallexample
21976
21977 @smallexample
21978 @group
21979 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21980 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21981 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21982 @end group
21983 @end smallexample
21984
21985 @smallexample
21986 @group
21987 (defun print-graph
21988 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21989 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21990 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21991 @end group
21992
21993 @group
21994 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21995 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21996 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21997 each row is five units.
21998 @end group
21999
22000 @group
22001 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
22002 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
22003 each column."
22004 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
22005 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
22006 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
22007 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
22008 @end group
22009 @group
22010 (height-of-top-line
22011 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22012 height
22013 ;; @r{else}
22014 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22015 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22016 @end group
22017 @group
22018 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22019 (full-Y-label-width
22020 (length
22021 (concat
22022 (number-to-string
22023 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22024 Y-axis-tic))))
22025 @end group
22026 @group
22027
22028 (print-Y-axis
22029 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22030 (graph-body-print
22031 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22032 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22033 @end group
22034 @end smallexample
22035 @c qqq
22036 @end ignore
22037
22038 @page
22039 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22040 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22041
22042 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22043 like this:
22044 @sp 1
22045
22046 @smallexample
22047 @group
22048 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22049 @end group
22050 @end smallexample
22051 @sp 1
22052
22053 @noindent
22054 Here is the graph:
22055 @sp 2
22056
22057 @smallexample
22058 @group
22059 1000 - *
22060 **
22061 **
22062 **
22063 **
22064 750 - ***
22065 ***
22066 ***
22067 ***
22068 ****
22069 500 - *****
22070 ******
22071 ******
22072 ******
22073 *******
22074 250 - ********
22075 ********* *
22076 *********** *
22077 ************* *
22078 50 - ***************** * *
22079 | | | | | | | |
22080 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22081 @end group
22082 @end smallexample
22083
22084 @sp 2
22085
22086 @noindent
22087 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22088
22089 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22090 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22091
22092 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22093 @sp 1
22094
22095 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22096 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22097 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22098 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22099 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22100 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22101
22102 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22103 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22104 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22105 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22106
22107 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22108 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22109 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22110 them from the free software community.
22111
22112 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22113 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22114 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22115 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22116 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22117 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22118 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22119 so that we cannot use it.
22120
22121 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22122 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22123
22124 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22125 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22126 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
22127 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
22128 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
22129 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22130 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22131 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22132 problems.
22133
22134 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22135 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22136 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22137 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22138 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22139
22140 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22141 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22142 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22143 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22144 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22145 views.
22146
22147 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22148 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22149 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22150 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22151 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22152 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22153 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22154 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22155
22156 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22157 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22158 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22159 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22160 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22161 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22162 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22163 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22164
22165 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22166 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22167 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22168 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22169
22170 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22171 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22172 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22173 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22174
22175 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22176 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22177 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22178 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22179 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22180
22181 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22182 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22183 change that.
22184
22185 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22186 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22187 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22188 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22189 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22190 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22191
22192 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22193 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22194 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22195 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22196 he must above all make it free.
22197
22198 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22199 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22200 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22201 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22202
22203 @sp 2
22204 @noindent
22205 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22206 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22207 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22208
22209 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22210 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22211
22212 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22213 @include doclicense.texi
22214
22215 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22216 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22217 @unnumbered Index
22218
22219 @ignore
22220 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22221 @end ignore
22222
22223 @printindex cp
22224
22225 @iftex
22226 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22227
22228 @tex
22229 \par\vfill\supereject
22230 \ifodd\pageno
22231 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22232 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22233 %\page\hbox{}\page
22234 \else
22235 % \par\vfill\supereject
22236 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22237 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22238 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22239 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22240 \fi
22241 @end tex
22242
22243 @c page
22244 @w{ }
22245
22246 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22247
22248 @w{ }
22249 @sp 8
22250 @center About the Author
22251 @sp 1
22252 @end iftex
22253
22254 @ifnottex
22255 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22256 @unnumbered About the Author
22257 @end ifnottex
22258
22259 @quotation
22260 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22261 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22262 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22263 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22264 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22265 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22266 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22267 airplane.
22268 @end quotation
22269
22270 @c @page
22271 @c @w{ }
22272 @c
22273 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22274 @c @tex
22275 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22276 @c @end tex
22277
22278 @c @iftex
22279 @c @headings off
22280 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22281 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22282 @c @end iftex
22283
22284 @bye